AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
RX-8020VBK
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR1
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
CDR
VCR 2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND
DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF INPUT
RX-8020V AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
TEST
2
3
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM PRESET
FM MODE
MEMORY
MENU
SOUND
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
ENTER
4
5
6
STANDBY
MASTER VOLUME
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
7/P
8
9
STANDBY/ON
MUTING DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
+10
10
0
+
100
RETURN FM MODE
SPEAKERS ON/OFF
1
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR
1
VCR
2
VIDEO
TV SOUND/DBS
SURROUND/DSP
OFF
INPUT
DIGITAL LEVEL
EQ ADJUST
+
+
+
SURROUND
DSP
ANALOG/DIGITAL
ANALOG DIRECT
BASS BOOST
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
2
TV/VIDEO
INPUT ATT
−
−
−
EXIT
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
SOUCE NAME
FM/AM
TEXT
DISPLAY
PLAY
EFFECT SETTING
CONTROL
MENU
USB AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE/MD
USB AUDIO
REC
PAUSE
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
PUSH OPEN
DOWN
UP
SOURCE NAME
DOWN
–
TUNING
–
UP
SLEEP
STOP CONTROL
PHONES
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
INSTRUCTIONS
For Customer Use:
Enter below the Model No. and Serial
No. which are located either on the rear,
bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No.
Serial No.
LVT0870-001A
[J]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Canada/pour Le Canada
THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS
B LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL
APPARATUS AS SET OUT IN THE INTERFERENCE-CAUSING
EQUIPMENT STANDARD ENTITLED “DIGITAL APPARATUS,”
ICES-003 OF THE DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.
CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE RESPECTE LES LIMITES DE
BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS
NUMERIQUES DE CLASSE B PRESCRITES DANS LA NORME
SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR; “APPAREILS
NUMERIQUES”, NMB-003 EDICTEE PAR LE MINISTRE DES
COMMUNICATIONS.
For Canada/pour le Canada
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT
ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES,
INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA
BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQUAU FOND
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
Attention: Ventilation Correcte
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage.
Locate the apparatus as follows:
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, l’incendie et tout autre dégât.
Disposer l’appareil en tenant compte des impératifs suivants
Front:
Sides:
Top:
Back:
Bottom:
No obstructions open spacing.
Avant:
Rien ne doit gêner le dégagement
Laisser 10 cm de dégagement latéral
Laisser 10 cm de dégagement supérieur
Laisser 15 cm de dégagement arrière
Rien ne doit obstruer par dessous; poser l’appareil
sur une surface plate.
No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides.
No obstructions in 10 cm from the top.
No obstructions in 15 cm from the back
No obstructions, place on the level surface.
Flancs:
Dessus:
Arrière:
Dessous:
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated.
Veiller également à ce que l’air circule le mieux possible comme
illustré.
Spacing 15 cm or more
Dégagement de 15 cm
ou plus
RX-8020VBK
Wall or obstructions
Mur, ou obstruction
Front
Avant
Stand height 15 cm or more
Hauteur du socle: 15 cm ou plus
Floor
Plancher
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Introduction................................................ 2 Setting Sound ........................................... 30
Features ...................................................................................... 2
Precautions ................................................................................. 2
Attenuating the Input Signal .................................................... 30
Turning Analog Direct On and Off .......................................... 30
Reinforcing the Bass ................................................................ 31
Activating the Subwoofer Sound ............................................. 31
Parts Identification...................................... 3
Getting Started........................................... 5
Using Surround Modes and DSP Modes ........ 32
Before Installation ...................................................................... 5
Checking the Supplied Accessories ........................................... 5
Connecting the FM and AM Antennas ....................................... 5
Connecting the Speakers ............................................................ 6
Connecting Audio/Video Components ....................................... 8
7 Analog Connections ............................................................... 8
7 Digital Connections .............................................................. 13
7 USB Connection ................................................................... 14
Connecting the Power Cord ..................................................... 15
Putting Batteries in the Remote Control .................................. 15
7 Surround Modes ................................................................... 32
Reproducing Theater Ambience ................................................ 32
Introducing the Surround Modes ............................................. 32
7 DSP Modes ........................................................................... 34
Available Surround and DSP Modes According to
the Speaker Layouts ........................................................... 35
Activating the Surround Modes ............................................... 36
Activating the DSP Modes ....................................................... 36
Using the DVD MULTI Playback Mode .......... 37
Basic Operations ....................................... 16
Activating the DVD MULTI Playback Mode .......................... 37
Turning On the Power .............................................................. 16
Selecting the Source to Play ..................................................... 16
Adjusting the Volume ............................................................... 18
Selecting the Front Speakers .................................................... 18
Listening Only with Headphones ............................................. 18
Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode ............................ 19
Muting the Sound ..................................................................... 20
Changing the Display Brightness ............................................. 20
Using the Sleep Timer .............................................................. 20
Adjusting Sound ........................................ 38
Basic Procedure ........................................................................ 38
Adjusting the Equalization Patterns—DIGITAL EQ ............... 39
Adjusting the Speaker Output Levels—LEVEL ADJUST ...... 40
Adjusting the Sound Parameters for the Surround and
DSP Modes—EFFECT ADJUST ...................................... 42
COMPU LINK Remote Control System ......... 43
TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System .. 44
Basic Settings........................................... 21
7 Showing the Disc Information on the TV Screen................. 45
7 Searching for a Disc (Only for the CD player) .................... 46
7 Entering the Disc Information .............................................. 47
Basic Procedure ........................................................................ 21
1 Setting the Speakers ........................................................... 22
2 Selecting Channel Numbers to Reproduce
Multi-channel Digital Software ................................... 23
3 Setting the Speaker Distance ............................................. 23
4 Setting the Bass Sounds ..................................................... 24
5 Setting the Dynamic Range ............................................... 24
6 Setting the Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminals ........... 25
7 Setting the Component Video Input ................................... 25
8 Memorizing the Volume Level for Each Source ................ 26
9 Showing the Text Information on the Display ................... 26
AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System .... 49
Operating JVC’s Audio/Video Components ... 51
Operating Audio Components .................................................. 51
Operating Video Components .................................................. 53
Operating Other Manufacturers’ Video
Equipment ............................................ 54
Troubleshooting......................................... 57
Specifications............................................ 59
Receiving Radio Broadcasts ........................ 27
Tuning into Stations Manually ................................................. 27
Using Preset Tuning ................................................................. 27
Selecting the FM Reception Mode........................................... 28
Operating the Tuner Using the On-Screen Display.................. 29
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
We would like to thank you for purchasing one of our JVC products.
Before operating this unit, read this manual carefully and thoroughly to obtain the best possible performance
from your unit, and retain this manual for future reference.
Features
Precautions
Dolby Digital EX*
Power sources
Dolby Digital EX is newly introduced surround encoding format
as an extension of multi-channel Dolby Digital, designed to add
an extra surround channel to Dolby Digital 5.1-channel. By using
a matrix encoding/decoding method, additional “surround back”
channel signal is encoded (and decoded) in both the left and right
surround channel signals.
• When unplugging the receiver from the wall outlet, always pull
the plug, not the AC power cord.
• Do not handle the AC power cord with wet hands.
• If you are not going to operate the receiver for an extended period
of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.
Ventilation
DTS-ES Extended Surround (DTS-ES)**
High power amplifiers built in this receiver will generate heat inside
the cabinet. For safety, observe the following carefully.
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor
ventilation could overheat and damage the receiver.
DTS-ES is another new format developed by Digital Theater
Systems, Inc., adding a surround back channel on the basis of
DTS Digital Surround.
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes. (If the ventilation
openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the
heat may not be able to get out.)
Dolby Pro Logic II*
Dolby Pro Logic II converts all 2-channel stereo software,
especially Dolby Surround encoded software, into 5-channel
(plus subwoofer) signals. It reproduces realistic Surround sounds
approaching to Dolby Digital 5.1-channel. Dolby Pro Logic II has
two modes to reproduce—Movie mode and Music mode.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall onto the unit, unplug the
unit and consult your dealer before operating any further.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases
shall be placed on the apparatus.
Neo:6**
Neo:6 can reproduce realistic Surround fields by converting
2-channel stereo software into 6-channel (plus subwoofer) signals.
Neo:6 has two modes to reproduce—Neo:6 Cinema and Neo:6
Music.
• Do not disassemble the unit since there are no user serviceable
parts inside.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your
JVC dealer.
DAP (Digital Acoustic Processor)
Sound field simulation technology allows precise ambience
recreation of existing theaters and halls. Thanks to the high-
performance DSP (Digital Signal Processor) and high-capacity
memory, you can enjoy 5.1-channel surround by playing
2-channel or multi-channel software.
Multi-channel headphone virtual surround
sound—3D HEADPHONE
The built-in headphone virtual surround system is compatible with
Multi-channel software like Dolby Digital, DTS Surround, etc.
Thanks to the new signal processing algorithms used by the high-
performance DSP, you can enjoy a natural surround sound through
the headphones.
COMPU LINK/TEXT COMPU LINK/AV COMPU
LINK remote control systems
These COMPU LINK remote control systems allow you to
operate other JVC’s audio/video components from this receiver.
*
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro
Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
** “DTS,” “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo:6” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts Identification
Become familiar with the buttons and controls on the receiver before use.
Refer to the pages in parentheses for details.
Front Panel
1
2
3 4
67 8
9
pq w
r
t
y
5
e
RX-8020V AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM PRESET
FM MODE
MEMORY
DGTL AUTO
DVD MULTI
PRO LOGIC
TUNED STEREO
L
C
R
ANALOG
LINEAR PCM
DIGITAL
STANDBY
DSP 3D PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE
-
MASTER VOLUME
SUBWFR LFE
HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONETOUCH OPERATION
AUTO MUTING
LS
S
RS
SB
STANDBY/ON
SPEAKERS
1
2
SLEEP VOLUME
SPEAKERS ON/OFF
1
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR
1
VCR
2
VIDEO
TV SOUND/DBS
SOURCE NAME
DIGITAL LEVEL
EQ ADJUST
SURROUND/DSP
OFF
INPUT
SURROUND
DSP
ANALOG/DIGITAL
ANALOG DIRECT
2
INPUT ATT
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
EFFECT SETTING
CONTROL
BASS BOOST
USB AUDIO
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE
/
MD USB AUDIO
FM / AM
DOWN
UP
SOURCE NAME
PHONES
d
u i o ;
a
s
f
g
h
U
S
B
A
U
D
IO
Display Window
S-VIDEO
PUSH OPEN
VIDEO
VIDE
O
3
8
1
2
4
6
7
9
-
5
0
L—
AUDIO—R
DGTL AUTO
DVD MULTI
PRO LOGIC
3D - PHONIC
TUNED STEREO
MIDNIGHT MODE
L
C
R
ANALOG
DSP
SUBWFR LFE
LINEAR PCM
DIGITAL
HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONETOUCH OPERATION
AUTO MUTING
LS
S
RS
When using the VIDEO input terminals
and/or USB AUDIO terminal on the front
panel, detach the terminal cover.
SB
SPEAKERS 1 2
SLEEP
VOLUME
=
~
!
&
@
#
$ %^
f
g
h
SOURCE NAME buttons (17)
CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ buttons (21, 41, 42)
BASS BOOST button and lamp (31)
Front Panel
1
2
STANBY/ON
button and STANDBY lamp (16)
• SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 button (18)
• SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 button (18)
FM/AM TUNING 5 / ∞ buttons (27)
DSP button and lamp (36)
FM/AM PRESET 5 / ∞ buttons (27, 28)
SURROUND/DSP OFF button (36)
FM MODE button (28)
MEMORY button (27)
Display window (16)
EFFECT button (42)
DIGITAL EQ (equalization) button (39)
Remote sensor (15)
LEVEL ADJUST button (41)
SETTING button (21)
MASTER VOLUME control (18)
ANALOG DIRECT button and lamp (30)
PHONES jack (18)
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF button (31)
SURROUND button and lamp (36)
USB AUDIO terminal (14)
Display Window
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
;
a
s
1
2
3
4
5
6
ANALOG indicator (19)
Speaker indicators and signal indicators (17)
DGTL (digital) AUTO indicator (19)
DVD MULTI indicator (37)
DSP indicator (18, 34)
•
•
PRO LOGIC indicator (33)
PRO LOGIC II indicator (32)
7
8
9
0
-
=
~
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
3D-PHONIC indicator (33, 34)
MIDNIGHT MODE indicator (24)
TUNED indicator (27)
STEREO indicator (27, 28)
ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator (26)
Digital signal format indicators (19)
SPEAKERS 1/2 indicators (18)
Main Display
HEADPHONE indicator (18, 34)
DIGITAL EQ (equalization) indicator (39)
INPUT ATT (attenuator) indicator (30)
SLEEP indicator (20)
VIDEO input jacks (10)
• INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL button (19)
• INPUT ATT button (30)
AUTO MUTING indicator (28)
VOLUME level indicator (16, 20)
d
Source selecting buttons and lamps (16, 17, 19, 27, 28, 37)
DVD MULTI, DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, PHONO,
CD, CDR, TAPE/MD, USB AUDIO, FM/AM
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control
Remote Control
1
2
Display window
buttons (16, 53 – 56)
CATV/DBS , VCR1
, TV
, AUDIO
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
3
Source selecting buttons (16, 17, 19, 27, 28, 37)
DVD, DVD MULTI, CD, FM/AM, TV/DBS, VIDEO, CDR, PHONO,
VCR1, VCR2, TAPE/MD, USB
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
SURROUND button (36)
DSP button (36)
ANALOG DIRECT button (30)
SOUND button (31, 39, 41)
DIMMER button (20)
MUTING button (20)
CATV/DBS CONTROL button (55)
TV/VIDEO button (53)
TEXT DISPLAY button (45 – 48)
MENU button (21, 29 – 31, 38)
REC PAUSE button (52, 53, 55)
SLEEP button (20)
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (19)
SURR (surround)/DSP OFF button (36)
• 10 keys for operating tuner (28)
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
2
DVD
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
TV/DBS
CDR
3
VCR1
VCR2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF
INPUT
4
5
y
u
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
2
3
6
7
8
MENU
SOUND
TEST
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
4
5
6
ENTER
i
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
• 10 keys for adjusting sound (31, 39, 41)
• 10 keys for operating audio/video components (51 – 55)
• CH (channel) +/– buttons (53 – 55)
• LEVEL +/– buttons* (39, 41)
7/P
8
9
DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
MUTING
∗
∗
∗
+10
100
10
0
9
o
+
RETURN FM MODE
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
o
;
These buttons function only after pressing 10 keys which are marked with
an asterisk (*).
p
q
+
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
TV/VIDEO
;
a
s
d
VOLUME +/– buttons (18)
−
MENU
−
−
TEXT
DISPLAY
TV VOL (volume) +/– buttons (53, 54)
EXIT button (21, 30, 31, 38, 40, 42, 45 – 47)
• TUNING UP /DOWN buttons (27)
• On-screen operating buttons (21, 29 – 31, 38 – 40, 42, 45 – 48)
• Operating buttons for audio/video components (51 – 53, 55, 56)
CONTROL button (51 – 53)
a
s
PLAY
EXIT
w
e
r
REC
PAUSE
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
d
f
DOWN – TUNING – UP
SLEEP
f
t
CONTROL
STOP
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
Remote control display window
Remote control display window
1
Remote control operation mode display (16)
• Remote control operation mode such as “DVD,” “CD,” “SOUND,” etc.
appears.
1
2
When the remote control operation mode changes, it is shown on the
display.
2
Signal transmission indicator
• Lights up when transmitting the remote control signals.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
This section explains how to connect audio/video components and speakers to the receiver, and how to connect the
power supply.
Before Installation
General Precautions
Connecting the FM and AM Antennas
FM Antenna Connections
• Be sure your hands are dry.
• Turn the power off to all components.
• Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going to
connect.
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
FM
A
B
75
75
L
L
FM
XIA
XIA
A
A
O
O
C
C
Locations
• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from
moisture.
AM
EXT
AM
EXT
AM
O
AM
O
P
P
LO
LO
• The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚C and
35˚C (23˚F and 95˚F ).
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor
ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.
FM Antenna (supplied)
Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.
ANENNA
FM 75
COAXIAL
Handling the receiver
• Do not insert any metal object into the receiver.
• Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or
cabinet.
• Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture.
AM
LOOP
Outdoor FM Antenna Cable (not
supplied)
Checking the Supplied Accessories
AM
EXT
Check to be sure you have all of the following items, which are
supplied with the receiver.
The number in the parentheses indicates quantity of the pieces
supplied.
A. Using the Supplied FM Antenna
The FM antenna provided can be connected to the FM 75 Ω
COAXIAL terminal as temporary measure.
• Remote Control (1)
B. Using the Standard Type Connector (Not Supplied)
A standard type connector should be connected to the FM 75 Ω
COAXIAL terminal.
• Batteries (2)
• AM Loop Antenna (1)
• FM Antenna (1)
Note:
If reception is poor, connect the outdoor FM antenna (not supplied).
Before attaching a 75 Ω coaxial cable (the kind with a round wire
going to an outdoor antenna), disconnect the supplied FM antenna.
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM Antenna Connections
Connecting the Speakers
ANTENNA
Turn the loop until you have
the best reception.
You can connect the following speakers:
FM 75
COAXIAL
• Two pairs of front speakers to produce normal stereo sound.
• One pair of surround speakers to enjoy the surround effect.
• One surround back speaker or one pair of surround back speakers
to enjoy 6.1-channel sound reproduction.
• One center speaker to produce more effective surround effect (to
emphasize human voices).
• One subwoofer to enhance the bass.
AM Loop Antenna
(supplied)
AM
LOOP
AM
EXT
IMPORTANT:
Snap the tabs on the loop into the
slots of the base to assemble the
AM loop.
After connecting the speakers listed above, set the speaker
setting information properly to obtain the best possible
Surround and DSP effect. For details, see page 22.
2
1
3
CAUTION:
Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the
speaker terminals.
Typical speaker layout
Outdoor single vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Notes:
• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl (not
supplied), remove the vinyl by twisting it as shown in the
diagram.
Center speaker
Subwoofer
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord. This could cause poor
reception.
• If reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire
(not supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna
connected.)
Left front speaker(s)
Right front speaker(s)
Right surround speaker
Left surround speaker
Surround back speaker(s)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic connecting procedure
1 Cut, twist and remove the insulation at the end of
each speaker signal cable (not supplied).
2
1
4
3
2 Turn the knob counterclockwise.
3 Insert the speaker signal cable.
4 Turn the knob clockwise.
For each speaker (except for a subwoofer), connect the (+) and
(–) terminals on the rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals
marked on the speakers.
Connecting the front, center and surround speakers
Surround
IMPORTANT:
Front speakers 1
speakers
Front speakers 2
Right / Left
Right / Left
Right / Left
To obtain the best possible output power from the
receiver, and to prevent the receiver from being
overheated, the receiver has the SPEAKER LOAD
SELECTOR which has to be set as follows:
Center speaker
• Set it to “HIGH” when the impedance of the front
speakers connected is within the range of 8 Ω to 16 Ω.
• Set it to “LOW” when the impedance of the front
speakers connected is within the range of 4 Ω to 6 Ω.
CAUTION : SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 8 16
+
+
–
+
Note:
CAUTION :
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
You can connect two pairs of front
speakers (one pair to the FRONT
SPEAKERS 1 terminals, and another pair
to the FRONT SPEAKERS 2 terminals).
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
4
6
LOW
8
16 HIGH
–
–
RIGHT
LEFT
1
2
SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND SPEAKERS
FRONT SPEAKERS
Note:
Connecting the surround back speakers
If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker quantity
(see page 22), connect the surround back speaker to the PRE OUT
SURR BACK L (left) jack.
To fully enjoy Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES Extended Surround
(see pages 32 and 33), you need to connect the surround back
speakers through a power amplifier connected to the PRE OUT
SURR BACK jacks on the rear panel, using a cable with RCA pin
plugs (not supplied). Connect the white plug to the audio left jack,
and the red plug to the audio right jack.
Connecting the subwoofer speaker
You can enhance the bass by connecting a subwoofer.
Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER jack on the rear panel, using a cable with RCA pin
plugs (not supplied).
Power amplifier
PRE OUT
FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
L
Left surround
back speaker
Right surround
back speaker
L
R
R
SUBWOOFER
Powered
subwoofer
PRE OUT
FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
Note:
You can place a subwoofer wherever you like since bass sound is
non-directional. Normally place it in front of you.
R
R
SUBWOOFER
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enhancing your audio system
Connecting Audio/Video Components
You can use this receiver as the pre-amplifier (control amplifier)
when you connect power amplifiers to the PRE OUT jacks on the
rear panel using cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, and the red plug to the
audio right jack.
You can connect the following audio/video components to this
receiver. Refer also to the manuals supplied with your components.
Audio Components
Video Components
• VCRs (VCR 1 and VCR 2)
• Video camera
• Turntable
Left front
speaker
Right front
speaker
• CD player*
• Cassette deck or
MD recorder*
• TV*
• DBS tuner*
• CD recorder*
• DVD player*
• Personal computer (PC)
Power amplifier
Center speaker
*
You can connect these components using the methods described in
“Analog Connections” (see below and page 14) and in “Digital
Connections” (see page 13).
Analog Connections
Power amplifier
Audio component connections
Use the cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, and the red plug to the
audio right jack.
CAUTION:
If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic equalizer
between the source components and this receiver, the sound output
through this receiver may be distorted.
PRE OUT
FRONT CENER SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
Turntable
R
R
SUBWOOFER
SUB
AUDIO
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
WOOFER
DVD
SURR
(REAR)
Turntable
PHONO
Power
amplifier
CD
To audio
output
OUT
(REC)
TAPE
MD
IN
(PLAY)
If a ground cable is
OUT
provided for your turntable,
connect the cable to the
screw marked (H) on the
rear panel.
(REC)
Power amplifier
CDR
IN
(PLAY)
Note:
This connection is for the turntable with an MM (moving-magnet) type
cartridge.
Any turntables incorporating a small-output cartridge such as an MC
(moving-coil) type must be connected to this receiver through a
commercial head amplifier or step-up transformer. Direct connection
may result in insufficient volume.
Left surround
speaker
Right surround
speaker
Left / Right
Surround back speakers
Note:
If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker quantity
(see page 22), connect the surround back speaker to the SURR
BACK L (left) jack.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD player
CD recorder
SUB
AUDIO
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
WOOFER
CD recorder
DVD
SURR
(REAR)
To audio output
To audio input
PHONO
SUB
WOOFER
AUDIO
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
CD
CD player
DVD
SURR
(REAR)
OUT
(REC)
TAPE
PHONO
MD
IN
To audio output
(PLAY)
CD
OUT
(REC)
OUT
CDR
(REC)
IN
TAPE
(PLAY)
MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
CDR
IN
(PLAY)
Cassette deck or MD recorder
Cassette deck
To audio output
To audio input
SUB
WOOFER
AUDIO
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
SURR
(REAR)
If your audio components have a COMPU LINK or TEXT
COMPU LINK jack
• See also page 43 for detailed information about the connection
and the COMPU LINK remote control system.
PHONO
CD
• See also page 44 for detailed information about the connection
and the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system.
OUT
(REC)
TAPE
MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
CDR
IN
(PLAY)
To audio input
To audio output
MD recorder
Note:
You can connect either a cassette deck or an MD recorder to the
TAPE/MD jacks. When connecting an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD
jacks, change the source name to “MD,” which will be shown on the
display when it is selected as the source. See page 17 for details.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video component connections
IMPORTANT:
This receiver is equipped with the following video jacks—composite
video, S-video and component video jacks. You can use any of the
three to connect a video component.
Use the cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, the red plug to the
audio right jack, and the yellow plug to the video jack.
• If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or
component video (Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) terminals, connect them using
an S-video cable (not supplied) and/or component video cable (not
supplied). By using these jacks, you can get a better picture
quality in the order—Component video > S-video > Composite
video.
However, the video signals from one type of these input jacks are
output only through the video output jacks of the same type.
Therefore, if a recording video component and a playing video
component are connected to the receiver through the video jacks of
the different type, you cannot record the picture. In addition, if the TV
and a playing video component are connected to the receiver through
the video jacks of the different type, you cannot view the playback
picture on the TV.
VCR(s)
C
D
A
S-VHS/VHS VCR
B
AUDIO
E F
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
OUT
(REC)
VCR1
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
VCR2
IN
(PLAY)
Å To left/right audio output
ı To left/right audio input
Ç To composite video output
Î To S-video output
MONITOR
OUT
A
C
D
‰ To composite video input
Ï To S-video input
S-VHS/VHS VCR
E
B
F
Video camera
VIDEO
The VIDEO input jacks on the front panel are convenient when
connecting and disconnecting the equipment frequently.
• When you do not use the jacks on the front panel, attach the
supplied front terminal cover to protect them from dust.
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
To audio
output
To S-video
output
• When attaching the cover
• When removing the cover
USB AUDIO
VIDEO
VIDEO
U
SB
S-VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
A
U
D
IO
S
To composite
video output
-V
ID
PUSH OPEN
E
O
V
V
ID
ID
E
O
E
O
L
—
A
U
D
IO
—
R
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV and/or DBS tuner
When connecting the TV to the AUDIO jacks
(TV SOUND/DBS), DO NOT connect the TV’s video output
to these video input jacks.
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
DBS
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
(REC)
VCR1
Y
PB/CB
PR/CR
IN
(PLAY)
A
OUT
TV
(REC)
VCR2
IN
(PLAY)
MONITOR
OUT
Connect the TV to the
appropriate MONITOR
OUT jacks to view a
play-backing picture
from other connected
video components.
B
C
D
Å To audio output
ı To composite video input
Ç To S-video input
Î To component video input
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
DBS
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
(REC)
VCR1
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
A
VCR2
DBS tuner
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
MONITOR
OUT
B
C
D
Å To audio output
Notes:
ı To S-video output
Ç To component video output
Î To composite video output
• When connecting a DBS tuner to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks,
change the source name to “DBS,” which will be shown on the
display when it is selected as the source. See page 17 for details.
• When connecting a DBS tuner to the component video input jacks,
make the component video input setting correctly. See pages 25
and 49 for details.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD player
• When you connect a DVD player with stereo output jacks:
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
DBS
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
(REC)
VCR1
Y
PB/CB
PR/CR
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
A
DVD player
VCR2
IN
(PLAY)
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
B
C
D
Å To front left/right audio output
ı To S-video output
Ç To component video output
Î To composite video output
• When you connect a DVD player with its analog discrete output (5.1-channel reproduction) jacks:
DVD player
B
C
A
G
F
DVD
D
E
VIDEO
VIDEO
SUB
COMPONENVIDEO
AUDIO
CENTER
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
WOOFER
DVD
DBS
DVD
DVD
FRONT
SURR
(REAR)
TV SOUND
DBS
PHONO
OUT
(REC)
MONITOR
OUT
CD
VCR1
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TAPE
MD
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
Å To rear left/right audio output
ı To center audio output
Ç To subwoofer output
Î To front left/right audio output
‰ To composite video output
Ï To S-video output
VCR2
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
CDR
MONITOR
OUT
IN
(PLAY)
Ì To component video output
Note:
When connecting a DVD player to the component video input jacks,
make the component video input setting correctly. See pages 25 and 49
for details.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Digital Connections
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have
been set for use with the following components:
– DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player
This receiver is equipped with four DIGITAL IN terminals—one
digital coaxial terminal and three digital optical terminals—and one
DIGITAL OUT terminal.
– DIGITAL 2 (optical): For CD player
– DIGITAL 3 (optical): For digital TV broadcast tuner
– DIGITAL 4 (optical): For CD recorder
IMPORTANT:
• When you want to operate the CD player, CD recorder, or MD
recorder using the COMPU LINK remote control system, connect
the target component also as described in “Analog Connections”
(see page 9).
• When connecting a DVD player, digital TV broadcast tuner or DBS
tuner using the digital terminals, you also need to connect it to the
video jacks on the rear. Without connecting it to the video jacks, you
can view no playback picture.
• When you want to operate a DVD player using the AV COMPU
LINK remote control system (see page 49), connect the DVD
player also as described in “Analog Connections” (see page 12).
• After connecting the components using the DIGITAL IN terminals,
set the following correctly if necessary.
– Set the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. For
details, see “6 Setting the Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminals”
on page 25.
– Select the digital input mode correctly. For details, see “Selecting
the Analog or Digital Input Mode” on page 19.
Digital input terminals
Digital output terminal
You can connect any digital equipment as follows.
Digital TV
CD recorder
MD recorder
DBS tuner
Digital VCR
DBS
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
between digital optical terminals
DVD player
CD player
DVD
CD recorder
MD recorder
When the digital recording
equipment such as an MD recorder
and CD recorder has a digital
optical input terminal, connecting it
to the DIGITAL OUT terminal
enables you to perform digital-to-
digital recording.
PCM/DOLBY DIGITAL
/DTS
Digital coaxial cable (not supplied)
between digital coaxial terminals
DIGITAL OUT
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
between digital optical terminals
Note:
The digital signal format output through the DIGITAL OUT terminal is
the same as that of the input signal. This means that when the DTS
Digital Surround signals are input, the DTS Digital Surround signals
are output.
When the component has a digital
coaxial output terminal, connect it to the
DIGITAL 1 (DVD) terminal, using a
digital coaxial cable (not supplied).
DIGITAL IN
When the component has a digital
optical output terminal, connect it to the
DIGITAL 2 (CD), DIGITAL 3 (TV) or
DIGITAL 4 (CDR) terminal, using a
digital optical cable (not supplied).
DIGITAL 1 (DVD)
DIGITAL 2 (CD)
DIGITAL 3 (TV)
Before connecting a digital
optical cable, unplug the
protective plug.
DIGITAL 4 (CDR)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check if the drivers are correctly installed.
1. Open the Control Panel on your PC: Select [Start] =
[Settings] = [Control Panel].
USB Connection
This receiver is equipped with a USB terminal on the front panel.
You can connect your PC to this terminal and enjoy sound
reproduced through your PC.
When you connect your PC for the first time, follow the procedure
below.
2. Select [System], then [Device Manager] and click [Sound,
video and game controllers] and [Universal serial bus
controllers].
The following window appears, and you can check whether
the drivers are installed.
• Remember you cannot send any signal or data to your PC from
this receiver.
IMPORTANT
• Check if your PC equipped with the CD-ROM drive is running on
R
R
R
Windows 98*, Windows Me* or Windows XP* and prepare its
CD-ROM.
• Check your PC’s BIOS setting—whether USB is available, and
whether USB IRQ is set to “AUTO” or to available IRQ number.
How to install the USB drivers
The following procedure is described using the English version of
R
Windows 98. If your PC is running on a different version of
operation system or language, the screens shown on your PC’s
monitor will differ from the ones used in the following procedure.
R
1. Turn on your PC and start running Windows 98,
R
R
Windows Me or Windows XP.
If the PC has been turned on, quit all the applications now running.
Note:
The items shown on the PC’s monitor differ depending on
your PC settings.
2. Turn on the receiver, and press USB AUDIO on the front
panel or USB on the remote control.
The lamp on the USB AUDIO on the front panel button lights
up.
6. Change the PC audio setting.
1. If you have closed Control Panel, open it again: Select [Start]
= [Settings] = [Control Panel].
2. Click [Multimedia], then select “USB Audio Device [1]” for
“Playback” of “Audio,” and close the window.
3. Connect the receiver to the PC using a USB cable (not
supplied).
Your PC automatically recognizes this connection, and shows
the following screen on the monitor.
To play back a CD from CD-ROM drive on PC, click [Multimedia],
[CD Music], then check [Enable digital CD audio for this CD-ROM
device].
USB AUDIO
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
Now PC is ready for playback through the USB connection.
After installation is completed, you can use your PC as the playback
source. The PC automatically recognizes the receiver whenever a
USB cable is connected between the PC and the receiver while the
receiver is turned on.
PC
USB cable
• When not using the PC as the playback source, disconnect the
USB cable.
To play back sounds on the PC, refer to the manuals supplied with
the sound reproduction application installed in the PC.
Notes:
• DO NOT turn off the receiver or disconnect the USB cable while
installing the drivers and for several seconds while your PC is
recognizing the receiver.
• Use a full speed USB cable (revision 1.0). Recommended cord
length is 1.5 m.
• If your PC does not recognize the receiver, disconnect the USB
cable and connect it again. If it does not work yet, restart Windows.
• The installed drivers can be recognized only when the USB cable is
connected between the receiver and your PC.
• The sound may not be played back correctly—interrupted or
degraded—due to your PC settings and PC specifications.
• When you do not use the jacks on the front panel, attach the
supplied front terminal cover to protect them from dust.
4. Install the USB drivers following the instructions shown on
the PC’s monitor.
R
R
R
R
* Microsoft , Windows 98, Windows Me and Windows XP are
registered trademarks of Microsoft corporation.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Putting Batteries in the Remote Control
Connecting the Power Cord
Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.
When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at
the remote sensor on the receiver.
Before plugging the receiver into an AC outlet, make sure that all
connections have been made.
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
1. On the back of the remote control, remove the
battery cover.
Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the
antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. We
recommend that you use a coaxial cable to connect the antenna,
since it is well-shielded against interference.
2. Insert batteries. Make sure to match the
Note:
polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
The preset settings such as preset channels and sound adjustment
may be erased in a few days in the following cases:
R6P(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
– When you unplug the power cord.
– When a power failure occurs.
CAUTIONS:
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When unplugging
the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage the cord.
3. Replace the cover.
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace
the batteries. Use two R6P(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell batteries.
Note:
After replacing the batteries, set the manufacturers’ codes again (see
page 54).
CAUTION:
Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:
• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity:
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may
differ in voltage.
• Always replace both batteries at the same time.
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
The following operations are commonly used when you play any sound sources.
Before using the remote control
Note:
How to confirm the remote control operation mode
A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn the
power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.
The display window on the remote control shows the following
information when you press certain buttons on the remote control, so
that you can confirm which operation you do.
Pressing one of the source selecting buttons,
the source name selected appears on the
Selecting the Source to Play
display.
Press one of the source selecting buttons.
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
Buttons
FM/AM
CD
Indications
TUNER
CD
PHONO
TAPE
DVD
CDR
USB
TV
VCR1
VCR2
VIDEO
The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up.
• The selected source name and the previously selected Surround/
DSP mode also appear on the display.
PHONO
TAPE/MD
DVD or DVD MULTI
CDR
Ex.: When you
press CD.
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR 1
VCR 2
VIDEO
TV SOUND/DBS
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR 1
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
CD
CDR
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
SOURCE NAME
FM / AM
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
USB
TV/DBS
VCR1
VCR2
VIDEO
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
SOURCE NAME
Ex.: When you
press USB.
On the front panel
From the remote control
Pressing SOUND before you adjust the sound
effect, “SOUND” appears on the display.
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
Selected source name and current
Surround/DSP mode appear
Pressing TEXT DISPLAY or MENU before
you use on-screen menu or TEXT COMPU
LINK, “MENU” appears on the display.
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
DGTL AUTO
DVD MULTI
PRO LOGIC
TUNED STEREO
L
C
R
ANALOG
DSP 3D–PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE
HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONETOUCH OPERATION
AUTO MUTING
SUBWFR LFE
LINEAR PCM
DIGITAL
Pressing CONTROL or CATV/DBS
LS
S
RS
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
SB
CONTROL before you operate an audio or
video equipment connected to the receiver,
the remote control operation mode selected
appears on the display (see pages 51 and 54).
SPEAKERS
1
2
SLEEP VOLUME
Ex.: When you
press CATV/
DBS CONTROL.
DVD MULTI
Select the DVD player for viewing the digital
video disc using the analog discrete output
mode (5.1-channel reproduction).
To enjoy the DVD MULTI playback, see
page 37.
Turning On the Power
On the front panel:
DVD
Select the DVD player.
VCR 1
Select the video component connected to the
VCR 1 jacks.
Select the video component connected to the
VCR 2 jacks.
Select the video component connected to the
VIDEO jacks.
STANDBY
Press STANDBY/ON
.
The STANDBY lamp goes off. The name of
the current source and Surround/DSP mode
appear on the display.
VCR 2
VIDEO
STANDBY/ON
Current source name and Surround/DSP mode appear
TV (SOUND)/DBS Select TV sounds (or the DBS tuner).
PHONO *
CD *
CDR *
Select the turntable.
Select the CD player.
Select the CD recorder.
L
R
ANALOG
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
TAPE/MD *
USB (AUDIO)
Select the cassette deck (or the MD recorder).
Select the personal computer (PC) connected
to the USB terminal.
Current volume level appears
FM/AM *
Select an FM or AM broadcast.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
To turn off the power (into standby mode),
press STANDBY/ON again.
The STANDBY lamp lights up.
STANDBY
STANDBY/ON
From the remote control:
Notes:
AUDIO
Press AUDIO
.
• When connecting an MD recorder (to the TAPE/MD jacks) and a
DBS tuner (to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks), change the source
names shown on the display. For details, see page 17.
• When you press one of the source selecting buttons on the remote
control marked with an asterisk (*), the receiver automatically turns
on.
The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off.
The name of the current source and Surround/DSP
mode appear on the display.
To turn off the power (into standby mode), press AUDIO
again. The STANDBY lamp on the front panel lights up.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the remote control:
Changing the source name
When you have connected an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD jacks
or a DBS tuner to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks on the rear panel,
change the source name which will be shown on the display.
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR 1
DVD MULTI
CD
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
VIDEO
CDR
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
On the front panel ONLY:
Note:
When changing the source name from “TAPE” to “MD”:
1. Press TAPE/MD (SOURCE NAME).
TAPE / MD
Once you have selected a video source, pictures of the selected
source are sent to the TV until you select another video source.
• Make sure “TAPE” appears on the display.
SOURCE NAME
2. Press and hold SOURCE NAME
Speaker and signal indicators on the display
(TAPE/MD) until “ASSGN. MD”
appears on the display.
By checking the following indicators, you can easily confirm which
speakers you are activating and which signals are coming into this
receiver from the source.
L
R
ANALOG
Speaker indicators (white)
Signal indicators (red)
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
L
C
R
L
C
R
When changing the source name from “TV” to “DBS”:
1. Press TV SOUND/DBS (SOURCE
SUBWFR LFE
SUBWFR LFE
TV SOUND/DBS
LS
S
RS
S
LS
RS
NAME).
SOURCE NAME
• Make sure “TV” appears on the display.
SB
SB
2. Press and hold SOURCE NAME (TV
SOUND/DBS) until “ASSGN. DBS”
appears on the display.
Surround back speaker
indicators *
The speaker indicators light up—:
• When the corresponding speakers are set to “LARGE” or
“SMALL” (see “1 Setting the Speakers” on page 22) and are also
required for the Surround/DSP mode currently selected.
L
R
ANALOG
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
*
If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker quantity
(see page 22), the center surround back speaker indicator lights up.
If you have selected “2SPK,” the left and right surround back
speaker indicators light up.
To change the source name to “TAPE” or “TV,” repeat the same
procedure above—press and hold SOURCE NAME (TAPE/MD) to
select “TAPE,” or press and hold SOURCE NAME (TV SOUND/
DBS) to select “TV.”
SUBWFR
• When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “YES,”
“1 Setting the Speakers” on page 22.)
lights up. (See
The signal indicators light up to indicate the incoming signals.
Note:
L
: • When digital input is selected: Lights up when the left
channel signal comes in.
Without changing the source name, you can still use the connected
components. However, there may be some inconvenience.
– “TAPE” or “TV” will appear on the display when you select the MD
recorder or DBS tuner.
– You cannot use the digital input (see page 19) for the MD recorder.
– You cannot use the COMPU LINK remote control system (see page
43) to operate the MD recorder.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
: • When digital input is selected: Lights up when the right
channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
: Lights up when the center channel signal comes in.
R
C
LFE : Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in.
LS : Lights up when the left surround channel signal comes in.
RS : Lights up when the right surround channel signal comes in.
Selecting different sources for picture and
sound
You can watch picture from a video component while listening to
sound from another component.
S
: When the monaural rear channel signal or 2 channel Dolby
Surround encoded signal comes in.
SB : Lights up when the surround back channel signal comes in.
Note:
Press one of the audio source selecting buttons— PHONO,
CD, CDR, TAPE/MD, USB (AUDIO), FM/AM—while
viewing the picture from a video component such as the
VCR or DVD player, etc.
When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, “L,” “C,” “R,” “LFE,” “LS”
and “RS” light up.
The lamp on the front panel button for the selected source lights up.
On the front panel:
DVD MULTI
TV SOUND/DBS
DVD
VCR 1
VCR 2
VIDEO
SOURCE NAME
FM / AM
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
SOURCE NAME
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use neither sets of the speakers, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1
and SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that the SPEAKERS 1 and
SPEAKERS 2 indicators disappear from the display.
The HEADPHONE indicator lights up and “HEADPHONE”
appears on the display.
Adjusting the Volume
On the front panel:
MASTER VOLUME
To increase the volume, turn MASTER
VOLUME clockwise.
To decrease the volume, turn it
counterclockwise.
• Activating the speakers turns on the Surround and DSP modes
previously selected.
Listening Only with Headphones
From the remote control:
You can listen with the headphones without deactivating both pairs
of speakers by connecting a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack
on the front panel. If you want to use a pair of headphones without
outputting sounds from the front speakers, you must turn off both
pairs of the front speakers as mentioned above.
To increase the volume, press VOLUME +.
To decrease the volume, press VOLUME –.
+
VOLUME
−
CAUTION:
HEADPHONE mode
When using the headphones, the following signals are output
regardless of your speaker setting:
— For 2 channel software, the front left and right channel signals
are output directly from the headphones.
— For multi-channel software, the front left and right, center, and
surround channel signals are down-mixed and then output
from the headphones.
Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any sources. If
the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy
can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers.
Notes:
• The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0” (minimum)
to “70” (maximum).
• If you set One Touch Operation to “ON” (see page 26), you do not
have to adjust the volume level each time you change the source. It
is automatically set to the stored level.
• If a DSP mode is activated, you can enjoy the DSP effects.
“3D H.PHONE” appears on the display and the DSP indicator
lights up on the display. (See page 34.)
Note:
Selecting the Front Speakers
In the following cases, the speakers connected to the FRONT
SPEAKERS 2 terminals are deactivated even if both pairs of the front
speakers are activated.
– If you select “DVD MULTI” as the source.
– If you select any of the Surround/DSP modes which activates the
center and/or surround speaker(s).
IMPORTANT:
You can activate two pairs of the front speakers at the same time only
when the SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is
set to the “HIGH” position and when signals are sent only to front
speakers. Otherwise, activating one pair of the speakers deactivates
the other.
CAUTION:
On the front panel ONLY:
Be sure to turn down the volume:
When you have connected two pairs of the front speakers, you can
select which to use.
• Before connecting or putting on headphones, as its high volume can
damage both the headphones and your hearing.
• Before turning on speakers again, as its high volume may output
from the speakers.
To use the speakers connected to the
FRONT SPEAKERS 1 terminals, press
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 so that the
SPEAKERS ON/OFF
1
SPEAKERS 1 indicator lights up on the
display. Make sure that the SPEAKERS 2
indicator is not lit on the display.
2
To use the speakers connected to the FRONT SPEAKERS 2
terminals, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that SPEAKERS 2
indicator lights up on the display. Make sure that the SPEAKERS 1
indicator is not lit on the display.
To use both sets of the speakers, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that the SPEAKERS 1 and SPEAKERS 2
indicators light up on the display.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DGTL AUTO: Select this for the digital input mode. The
receiver automatically detects the incoming
signals.
Selecting the Analog or Digital Input
Mode
The DGTL AUTO indicator lights up on the
display, and the digital signal format indicators
for the detected signals also light up.
When you have connected digital source components using the
digital terminals (see page 13), you need to change the input mode
for these components to the appropriate digital input mode
correctly—DGTL AUTO, DGTL DTS, or DGTL D.D.
ANALOG:
Select this for the analog input mode.
The ANALOG indicator lights up.
Before you start, remember...
The digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting should be
correctly done for the sources you want to select the digital input
mode for (see “6 Setting the Digital Input (DIGITAL IN)
Terminals” on page 25). Without setting this digital input terminal
correctly, you cannot change the input mode from analog input to
digital input even if you follow the procedure below.
When selecting “DGTL AUTO,” the following indicators
showing detected signals light up on the display.
: Lights up when Linear PCM signals come
in.
LINEAR PCM
LINEAR PCM
: Lights up when the digital signals are not
recognized.
1. Press one of the source selecting buttons—DVD, TV
(SOUND)/DBS, CD, CDR, or TAPE/MD—for which you
DIGITAL : Lights up when Dolby Digital or Dolby
Digital EX signals come in.
want to change the input mode.
The lamp on the front panel button for the selected source lights
up.
: Lights up when DTS Surround or DTS-ES
signals come in.
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR 2
VIDEO
TV SOUND/DBS
VCR 1
When playing a software encoded with the Dolby Digital or DTS
Digital Surround, the following symptoms may occur:
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.
• Noise comes out while chapters or tracks are being searched for or
skipped over.
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR 1
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
CD
CDR
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
SOURCE NAME
FM / AM
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
SOURCE NAME
1. Press INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL (INPUT ATT) or
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT on the remote control.
• “DGTL AUTO” appears on the display.
On the front panel
Note:
From the remote control
2. Press CONTROL UP 5 or DOWN ∞ on the front panel to
select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” while “DGTL AUTO”
still remains on the display.
• Each time you press the button, the input mode changes as
follows:
If “TAPE” has been assigned as the source name to the TAPE/MD
button when using an MD recorder, it does not work in this step.
To change the source name, see “Changing the source name” on
page 17.
DGTL AUTO
L
R
2. Press INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL (INPUT ATT)—or
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT on the remote control—
briefly to change the input mode.
DIGITAL
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
INPUT
ANALOG/DIGITAL
ANALOG/DIGITAL
INPUT
DGTL AUTO
DGTL D.D
(Digital)
(Digital Dolby Digital)
INPUT ATT
DGTL DTS
(Digital)
On the front panel
From the remote control
When selecting “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS,” the following
indicators showing detected signals light up on the display.
• Each time you press the button, the input mode changes as
follows:
DGTL
When selecting “DGTL D.D”
: • Lights up when Dolby Digital signals
: Always lights up.
DGTL AUTO
L
R
DIGITAL
come in.
DIGITAL
• The frame flashes when Dolby Digital
signals are not recognized.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
When selecting “DGTL DTS”
: • Lights up when DTS Digital Surround
DGTL AUTO
ANALOG
signals come in.
(Digital)
• The frame flashes when DTS Digital
Surround signals are not recognized.
Note:
When you turn off the power or select another source, “DGTL D.D”
and “DGTL DTS” settings are canceled and the digital input mode is
automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.”
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the shut-off time comes:
The receiver turns off automatically.
Muting the Sound
From the remote control ONLY:
To check or change the time remaining until the shut-off time:
Press SLEEP once.
The remaining time until the shut-off time appears in minutes.
• To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.
Press MUTING to mute the sound through
all speakers and headphones connected.
“MUTING” appears on the display and the volume
turns off (the volume level indicator goes off).
MUTING
To cancel the Sleep Timer:
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP 0min” appears on the display.
(The SLEEP indicator goes off.)
L
R
ANALOG
• Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer.
SPEAKERS
1
Recording a source
For analog-to-analog recording
The volume level
indicator goes off.
Ex.: When the source is “DVD.”
You can record any analog source through the receiver to—
• the cassette deck (or MD recorder) connected to the TAPE/MD
jacks,
• the VCRs connected to the VCR 1 and VCR 2 jacks, and
• the CD recorder connected to the CDR jacks
—at the same time.
To restore the sound, press MUTING again.
• Turning MASTER VOLUME on the front panel or pressing
VOLUME +/– on the remote control also restores the sound.
Changing the Display Brightness
You can dim the display.
For digital-to-digital recording
You can record the currently selected digital input source
through the receiver to a digital recording device connected to
the DIGITAL OUT terminal.
From the remote control ONLY:
DIMMER
Press DIMMER.
• Each time you press the button, the display dims
Notes:
• Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog recordings are not
possible.
and brightens alternately.
• The output volume level, Midnight Mode (see page 24), Bass
Boost (see page 31), digital equalization (see page 39),
Surround modes and DSP modes (see pages 32 to 36) cannot
affect the recording.
• The test tone signal (see pages 40 and 41) does not come out
through the DIGITAL OUT terminal.
Using the Sleep Timer
Using the Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to music.
Basic adjustment auto memory
This receiver memorizes sound settings for each source—
• when you turn off the power,
From the remote control ONLY:
Press SLEEP repeatedly.
The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display, and
SLEEP
• when you change the source, and
• when you assign the source name (see page 19).
the shut-off time changes in 10 minutes intervals:
When you change the source, the memorized settings for the
newly selected source are automatically recalled.
The following can be stored for each source:
• Analog/digital input mode (see page 19)
• Input attenuator mode (see page 30)
L
R
ANALOG
SPEAKERS
1
SLEEP VOLUME
• Analog Direct (see page 30)
• Speaker channel output levels (see pages 40 and 41)
• Digital equalization pattern (see page 39)
• Sound parameters (see page 42)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
(Canceled)
• Surround and DSP mode selection (see pages 35 and 36)
• Bass Boost setting (see page 31)
0
Ex.: When the source is “DVD.”
Notes:
• If the source is FM or AM, you can assign a different setting for
each band.
• If you want to memorize the volume level with the above
settings, set “ONE TOUCH (OPR)” to “ON” (see page 26).
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Settings
Some of the following settings are required after connecting and positioning your speakers while others will make
operations easier.
• When performing the basic settings, it is recommended to use the remote control so that you can show the
on-screen display on the TV.
• When using the buttons on the front panel, you can perform the same settings. (The following on-screen display
cannot be shown if you use the buttons on the front panel.)
• The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for about 1 minute.
Basic Procedure
Ex. When setting the subwoofer information
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control):
On the front panel:
Before you start, remember....
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
1. Press MENU.
PLAY
MENU
/REW
EXIT
FF/
The MENU screen appears on
the TV.
PAUSE
SET
SETTING
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until
DOWN – TUNING – UP
“SUB WOOFER” appears on the
display.
CONTROL
STOP
On-screen operating
buttons
Each time you press the button, the setting items
change as follows.
• For details about each setting item (1 to 9), see pages 22 to
26.
L
R
ANALOG
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
press 2 or 3.
to “SETTING,” then
SETTING 1 menu showing setting items appears on the TV.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
• The item pointed by
is also shown on the display on the
unit.
FRONT SPK:LARGE (1)
SURR SPK:SMALL (1)
SBACK OUT:2SPK (1)
EX/ES:AUTO (2)
SUB WOOFER:NO (1)
CNTR SPK:SMALL (1)
SBACK SPK:SMALL (1)
SURR CH:SURR (1)
DIST UNIT:meter (3)
CNTR DIST:3.0m (3)
SBACK DIST:3.0m (3)
LFE ATT:0dB (4)
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SUBWOOFER.”
• To go to the next screen, press ∞ continuously.
• To go back to the previous screen, press 5 continuously.
FRONT DIST:3.0m (3)
SURR DIST:3.0m (3)
CROSS OVER:100Hz (4)
MID NIGHT:OFF (5)
2:CD 3:TV 4:CDR (6)
VIDEO DBS:S/C (7)
FL DISP:TEXT (9)
3
1
2
4
5
DGTL COAX 1:DVD (6)
VIDEO DVD:S/C (7)
ONE TOUCH:OFF (8)
(Back to the beginning)
SETTING 1 menu
SETTING 2 menu
6
7
8
9
CONTROL
2. Press CONTROL UP 5 or
DOWN ∞ to select a setting you
DOWN
UP
SETTING 3 menu
want to use.
In this example, the subwoofer information is
set to “YES” to output bass sound through the
subwoofer.
For details about each setting item (1 to 9), see pages 22 to 26.
4. Press 2 or 3 to select
L
R
ANALOG
a setting you want to
use.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
In this example, the
subwoofer information is set
to “YES” to output bass
sound through the
subwoofer.
NOTICE—
• Items shown on the on-screen display and on the front
panel display in this section are initial values when shipped
from the factory.
• Some of the items cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted
according to currently selected settings. (For details, see
the respective explanation.)
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Surround back speakers quantity—S BACK (SBACK)
1 Setting the Speakers
OUT
To obtain the best possible surround sound from the Surround and
DSP modes, you have to register the setting about the speaker
arrangement after all connections are completed.
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
7 Subwoofer setting—SUBWOOFER
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
Select the surround back speakers quantity.
2SPK
1SPK
: Select this to use 2 surround back speakers.
: Select this to use 1 surround back speaker.
Select whether you have connected a subwoofer or not.
Notes:
YES
NO
: Select this when a subwoofer is connected.
: Select this when no subwoofer is used.
• If you have selected “NONE” for the surround back speakers
(see the left), this setting cannot be available.
• If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker
quantity, connect the surround back speaker to the PRE OUT
SURR BACK L (left) jack.
Note:
If you have selected “NO” for the subwoofer, you cannot use
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF on the front panel.
7 Selecting surround speakers to use—SURR CH
7 Sizes for front speakers, center speaker, surround
speakers, and surround back speakers–—FRONT
SPK, CENTER (CNTR) SPK, SURR SPK, S BACK
(SBACK) SPK
(OUT)
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
Select the surround speakers to activate when playing back 5.1-
multi-channel software.
SURR
: Select this to use only the left and right
surround speakers.
SBACK
: Select this to use only the surround back
speakers.
Select the sizes for each connected speaker.
SURR+SBK : Select this to use both the surround speakers
LARGE : Select this when the speaker size is relatively large.
SMALL : Select this when the speaker size is relatively small.
(S+SBK)
and surround back speakers.
Notes:
NONE : Select this when you have not connected a speaker.
(Not selectable for the front speakers)
• If you have selected “NONE” for the surround back speakers
(see the left), this setting is skipped.
• If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker
quantity, this setting is skipped. The surround channels’ signals
are output through the surround speakers.
• This setting is ignored when performing 6.1-channel
reproduction.
Notes:
• Keep the following comments in mind as reference when
adjusting.
– If the size of the cone speaker unit built in your speaker is
larger than 12 cm (4 3/4 inches), select “LARGE,” and if it is
smaller than 12 cm (4 3/4 inches), select “SMALL.”
• If you have selected “NO” for the subwoofer setting, you can
only select “LARGE” for the front speakers.
• If you have selected “SMALL” for the front speakers, you
cannot select “LARGE” for the center, surround, and surround
back speakers.
• If you have selected “SMALL” for the surround speakers, you
cannot select “LARGE” for the surround back speakers.
• If you have selected “NONE” for the surround speakers, the
surround back speakers are fixed to “NONE.”
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Selecting Channel Numbers to Reproduce
Multi-channel Digital Software—EX/ES
3 Setting the Speaker Distance
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is another
important element to obtain the best possible sound of the Surround
and DSP modes. You need to set the distance from your listening
point to the speakers.
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
By referring to the speaker distance setting, this unit automatically
sets the delay time of the sound through each speaker so that sounds
through all the speakers can reach you at the same time.
7 Measuring unit—UNIT
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
You can select 5.1-channel reproduction or 6.1-channel reproduction
when playing back multi-channel (more than 5.1-channel) digital
software with setting the surround back speakers to “LARGE” or
“SMALL” (see page 22). “AUTO” is initial setting.
AUTO : Select this to reproduce signals originally recorded as
marked on the software such as
• When playing back Dolby Digital EX software (bearing
the mark ,) “DOLBY D EX (Dolby Digital EX)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software,
“DOLBY D (Dolby Digital)” activates without using the
surround back speaker(s).
or
.
Select which unit you use.
meter : Select this to set the distance in meters.
feet : Select this to set the distance in feet.
7 Speaker distance—FRONT DIST, CENTER (CNTR)
• When playing back DTS-ES Discrete software (bearing
DIST, SURR DIST, S BACK (SBACK) DIST
the mark
,) “ES DSCRETE (DTS-ES Discrete)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back DTS-ES Matrix software (bearing the
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
mark
,) “ES MATRIX (DTS-ES Matrix)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel
software, “DTS (DTS Digital Surround)” activates
without using the surround back speaker(s).
ON
: Select this to activate 6.1-channel reproduction using the
surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back Dolby Digital EX software (bearing
the mark
,) “DOLBY D EX (Dolby Digital EX)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software,
“DOLBY D EX (Dolby Digital EX)” activates using the
surround back speaker(s). Surround back channels are
reproduced using digital matrix processing.
Set the distance from the listening point within the range of
0.3 m (1 ft) to 9.0 m (30 ft), in 0.3 m (1 ft) intervals.
Notes:
• When playing back DTS-ES Discrete software (bearing
• You cannot set the speaker distance for the speakers you have
selected “NONE” (see page 22).
• This setting is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.
the mark
,) “ES DSCRETE (DTS-ES Discrete)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back DTS-ES Matrix software (bearing the
mark
,) “ES MATRIX (DTS-ES Matrix)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel
software, “DTS NEO:6” activates using the surround
back speaker(s). Surround back channels are reproduced
using digital matrix processing.
C
L
R
3.3 m
(11 ft)
3.0 m
(10 ft)
2.7 m
30˚
30˚
90˚
90˚
(9 ft)
OFF : Select this to activate 5.1-channel reproduction without
using the surround back speaker(s).
2.4 m
(8 ft)
2.1 m
(7 ft)
• When playing back Dolby Digital EX software (bearing
LS
RS
the mark
) or DTS-ES software (bearing the mark
,) the surround back signals are output from the
surround speakers mixed with the surround signals.
• When playing back Dolby Digital or DTS Digital
Surround 5.1-channel software, conventional “DOLBY D
(Dolby Digital)” or “DTS (DTS Digital Surround)”
activates.
60˚
60˚
LSB
RSB
Note:
If you have selected “NONE” for the surround back speakers (see
page 22), you cannot select this setting. The 6.1-channel and 5.1-
channel software are played back as “OFF” is selected.
EX. In the above case, set the speaker distance as follows:
FRONT DIST
:
:
:
:
3.0 m or 10 ft
3.0 m or 10 ft
2.7 m or 9 ft
2.4 m or 8 ft
CENTER (CNTR) DIST
SURR DIST
S BACK (SBACK) DIST
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Setting the Bass Sounds
5 Setting the Dynamic Range—MID NIGHT
You can adjust subwoofer and bass sounds precisely according to
your preference.
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
7 Crossover frequency—CROSSOVER
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
You can enjoy a powerful sound at night using the Midnight Mode.
Select one of the following:
1
2
: Select this when you want to reduce the dynamic range. The
MIDNIGHT MODE indicator lights up on the display.
When you use a subwoofer, you can select the cutoff frequency
for the small speakers used.
: Select this when you want to apply the compression effect
(useful at midnight). The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator
lights up on the display.
Select one of the crossover frequency levels from “80Hz,”
“100Hz,” “120Hz” and “150Hz” according to the size of the
small speaker connected.
OFF : Select this when you want to enjoy surround with its full
dynamic range (no effect applied). The MIDNIGHT MODE
indicator goes off from the display.
80Hz
: Select this frequency when the cone speaker unit
built in the speaker is about 12 cm (4 3/4 inches).
100Hz : Select this frequency when the cone speaker unit
built in the speaker is about 10 cm (3 15/16 inches).
Notes:
• If Analog Direct is in use, Midnight Mode is temporarily canceled.
• Midnight Mode is not valid for DVD MULTI playback mode even
though the setting is adjustable.
120Hz : Select this frequency when the cone speaker unit
built in the speaker is about 8 cm (3 3/16 inches).
150Hz : Select this frequency when the cone speaker unit
built in the speaker is about 6 cm (2 3/8 inches).
Notes:
.• If you have selected “LARGE” for all activated speakers (see
page 22), this function is fixed to “OFF.”
• Crossover frequency is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback,
All Channel Stereo and 3D HEADPHONE mode.
7 Low frequency effect attenuator—LFE ATT
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
If the bass sound is distorted while playing back software
encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS Surround, set the LFE level
to eliminate distortion.
Select one of the following:
0dB
: Normally select this.
−10dB : Select this when the bass sound is distorted.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When “DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)” is set to “CD”
6 Setting the Digital Input (DIGITAL IN)
Terminals
2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR
2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD**
2: DVD 3: MD** 4: CDR
2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR
(back to the beginning)
“
“
“
“
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
* If you have changed the source name from “TV” to “DBS,”
“DBS” appears (see page 17).
** If you want to connect an MD recorder to the digital input
terminal, change the source name to “MD” from “TAPE” (see
page 17).
When you use the digital input terminals, you have to register which
components you have connected to the digital input terminals.
Note:
When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have been
set for use with the digital inputs for the following components:
– DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player
7 Digital coaxial terminal—DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)
Set the component connected to the digital coaxial terminal
– DIGITAL 2 (optical): For CD player
(DIGITAL IN 1)—DVD, MD**, CDR, TV (or DBS*) or CD.
– DIGITAL 3 (optical): For digital TV broadcast tuner
– DIGITAL 4 (optical): For CD recorder
* If you have changed the source name from “TV” to “DBS,”
“DBS” appears (see page 17).
** If you want to connect an MD recorder to the digital input
terminal, change the source name to “MD” from “TAPE” (see
page 17).
7 Setting the Component Video Input
When you use the component video inputs for the DVD player and/
or DBS tuner, you have to register the type of input jacks.
Without setting this correctly, you cannot view the correct input on
the TV.
7 Digital optical terminals—DIGITAL 2, DIGITAL 3 and
DIGITAL 4
Set the components connected to the digital optical terminals
(DIGITAL IN 2 – 4).
• Each time you press 2 or 3 on the remote control or
CONTROL UP 5 or DOWN ∞ on the front panel, the digital
component names change as follows:
7 For the DVD player—VIDEO DVD
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
When “DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)” is set to “DVD”
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS* ) 4: CDR
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD**
2: CD 3: MD** 4: CDR
2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS* ) 4: CDR
(back to the beginning)
“
“
“
“
Select one of the following:
COMPONENT : Select this when connecting the DVD
(COMPNT)
player to the component video input jacks.
When “DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)” is set to “MD”**
S/C
: Select this when connecting the DVD
player to the composite video or S-video
input jacks.
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD
2: CD 3: DVD 4: CDR
2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR
(back to the beginning)
“
“
“
“
7 For the DBS tuner—VIDEO DBS
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
When “DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)” is set to “CDR”
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD**
2: CD 3: MD** 4: DVD
2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD
(back to the beginning)
“
“
“
“
Select one of the following:
When “DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)” is set to “TV” or
“DBS”*
COMPONENT : Select this when connecting the DBS
(COMPNT)
tuner to the component video input jacks.
2: CD 3: DVD 4: CDR “ 2: CD 3: DVD 4: MD**
2: CD 3: MD** 4: CDR “ 2: MD** 3: DVD 4: CDR “
(back to the beginning)
“
S/C
: Select this when connecting the DBS tuner
to the composite video or S-video input
jacks.
Note:
If you have not selected appropriate video input jacks, the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system cannot operate properly.
(See page 49.)
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Memorizing the Volume Level for Each Source 9 Showing the Text Information on the Display
—ONE TOUCH OPR (ONE TOUCH)
—FL DISPLAY (DISP)
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
This unit memorizes some settings separately for each source—One
Touch Operation (see page 20).
In addition, you can store the volume level for each source with the
other memorized settings.
When you have connected an MD recorder or CD player equipped
with TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system (see page 44),
you can show the text information such as disc title or track title on
the display of this receiver.
Select one of the following:
Select one of the following:
NORMAL
(NORM)
: Source name and Surround/DSP mode appear
during play.
ON
: Select this to store the volume level separately for each
source. (The ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator
lights up on the display.)
TEXT
:Text information appears during play.
This receiver memorizes the volume level—
• when you change the source and
Note:
• when you change the source name.
Though you have selected “TEXT,” the source name and
Surround/DSP mode will appear while playing a disc that has no text
information.
OFF
: Select this not to store the volume level.
To recall the volume level
With the ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator lit, the volume level
for the currently selected source is recalled when the source is
selected.
To cancel the One Touch Operation
Set One Touch Operation to “OFF” so that the ONE TOUCH
OPERATION indicator goes off.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Radio Broadcasts
You can browse through all the stations or use the preset function to go immediately to a particular station.
Tuning into Stations Manually
Using Preset Tuning
On the front panel:
Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be
quickly tuned in. You can preset up to 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
FM/AM
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
(FM or AM).
To store the preset stations
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button
lights up. The last received station of the
selected band is tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
On the front panel ONLY:
TUNED STEREO
L
R
ANALOG
1. Tune in the station you want to preset (see
“Tuning into Stations Manually” on the left).
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station,
select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the
FM Reception Mode” on page 28.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
2. Press FM/AM TUNING 5 or ∞
FM/AM TUNING
until you find the frequency you
TUNED STEREO
L
R
ANALOG
want.
• Pressing FM/AM TUNING 5 increases
the frequency.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
• Pressing FM/AM TUNING ∞ decreases
the frequency.
MEMORY
2. Press MEMORY.
From the remote control:
FM / AM
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
TUNED STEREO
L
R
ANALOG
(FM or AM).
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button
lights up. The last received station of the
selected band is tuned in.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
The channel number position starts flashing on the display for
about 10 seconds.
FM/AM PRESET
3. Press FM/AM PRESET 5 or ∞ to
2. Press TUNING UP 3 or
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
DOWN – TUNING – UP
select a channel number while the
channel number position is
flashing.
TUNING DOWN 2 until
you find the frequency you
want.
TUNED STEREO
• Pressing TUNING UP 3 increases the
L
R
ANALOG
frequency.
• Pressing TUNING DOWN 2 decreases the
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
frequency.
Notes:
MEMORY
4. Press MEMORY again while the
selected channel number is
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the TUNED
indicator lights up on the display.
• When an FM stereo program is received, the STEREO indicator
also lights up.
flashing on the display.
The selected channel number stops flashing.
The station is assigned to the selected channel number.
• When you hold and then release the button in step 2, the frequency
keeps changing until a station is tuned in.
TUNED STEREO
L
R
ANALOG
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the stations
you want.
To erase a stored preset station
Storing a new station on a used number erases the previously stored
one.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tune in a preset station
On the front panel:
Selecting the FM Reception Mode
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy, you can
change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast.
• You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station (see
page 27).
FM/AM
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
(FM or AM).
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button lights
up. The last received station of the selected band is
tuned in.
While listening to an FM station, press FM MODE.
• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode alternates
between “FM AUTOMUTING” and “FM MODE MONO.”
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
FM/AM PRESET
2. Press FM/AM PRESET 5 or ∞
FM MODE
SBACK•L
∗
until you find the channel you
0
want.
FM MODE
• Pressing FM/AM PRESET 5 increases the
number.
On the front panel
From the remote control
• Pressing FM/AM PRESET ∞ decreases the
number.
TUNED STEREO
L
R
ANALOG
From the remote control:
AUTO MUTING
VOLUME
FM / AM
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
SPEAKERS
1
(FM or AM).
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button lights
up. The last received station of the selected band is
tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
TUNED
L
R
ANALOG
BASS
2. Press the 10 keys to select a
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
TEST
2
3
preset channel number.
• For channel number 5, press 5.
• For channel number 15, press +10
then 5.
• For channel number 20, press +10
then 10.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
MENU
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
ENTER
4
5
6
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
7/P
8
9
FM AUTOMUTING: Normally select this.
When a program is broadcasted in
DIGITALEQ SBACK•L
SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
10
RETURN
0
+10
+
100
FM MODE
stereo, you will hear stereo sound;
when in monaural, you will hear
monaural sounds. This mode is also
useful to suppress static noise between
stations. The AUTO MUTING indicator
lights up on the display. (Initial setting)
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10,
then 10.
Note:
When you use the 10 keys on the remote control, be sure that they
are activated for the tuner, not for the CD and others. (See page 51.)
FM MODE MONO: Select this to improve the reception (but
stereo effect will be lost).
In this mode, you will hear noise while
tuning into the stations. The AUTO
MUTING indicator goes off from the
display. (The STEREO indicator also
goes off.)
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Storing the preset stations
Operating the Tuner Using the On-Screen
Display
1. Press MENU.
The MENU screen appears on the TV.
You can also operate the tuner using the on-screen display.
• The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for
about 1 minute.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “TUNER
CONTROL,” then press 2 or 3.
The TUNER CONTROL menu appears.
7 Operating the tuner
3. Tune into a station you want to store on the
TUNER CONTROL menu, referring to
“Operating the tuner”.
1. Press MENU.
PLAY
MENU
/REW
EXIT
FF/
The MENU screen appears on
the TV.
4. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “PRESET
PAUSE
SET
MEMORY,” then press 2 or 3.
moves to “PRESET CH” and the channel number starts
DOWN – TUNING – UP
flashing.
CONTROL
STOP
On-screen operating
buttons
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “TUNER
CONTROL,” then press 2 or 3.
The TUNER CONTROL menu appears.
5. Press 2 or 3 to select a channel number you
want.
6. Press SET to store the setting.
The selected channel number stops flashing.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until you store all the stations
you want.
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to an item you want to
8. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
set or adjust.
On the TUNER CONTROL menu, you can do the following:
BAND:
Select the band.
PRESET CH:
FREQUENCY:
FM MODE:
Select a preset channel station.
Tune in a station manually.
Select the FM reception mode.*
See “Storing the preset stations” on
the right.
PRESET MEMORY:
Note:
* “FM MODE” is not displayed when an AM station is selected.
4. Press 2 or 3 to select an item you want to use.
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Sound
You can select the following sound settings to your preference according to your listening conditions or sources.
• Items shown in this section are the initial values when shipped from the factory.
• The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for about 1 minute.
Attenuating the Input Signal
Turning Analog Direct On and Off
When the input level of the analog source is too high, the sounds
will be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input
signal level to prevent the sound distortion.
You can enjoy the sound closer to the original source by overriding
the sound adjustments such as speaker output level adjustments (see
page 40), Equalization pattern (see page 39), Surround and DSP
modes (see pages 32 to 36), Bass Boost (see page 31) and Midnight
Mode (see page 24). You can only adjust the volume level while
Analog Direct is in use.
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
On the front panel:
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
INPUT
Press and hold INPUT ATT (INPUT
ANALOG/DIGITAL
ANALOG/DIGITAL) so that the
INPUT ATT indicator lights up on the
display.
• Each time you press and hold the button, the
input attenuator mode turns on (“ATT ON”) or
off (“NORMAL”).
Press ANALOG DIRECT to turn on Analog Direct.
The ANALOG DIRECT lamp on the front panel button lights up.
• Each time you press the button, Analog Direct turns on and off.
– When Analog Direct turns on, “A. DIRECT” appears on the
display.
INPUT ATT
ANALOG DIRECT
ANALOG
DIRECT
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
1. Press MENU.
PLAY
MENU
/REW
EXIT
FF/
The MENU screen appears on
the TV.
On the front panel
From the remote control
PAUSE
SET
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
1. Press MENU.
DOWN – TUNING – UP
The MENU screen appears on the TV.
CONTROL
STOP
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SOUND
On-screen operating
buttons
CONTROL,” then 2 or 3.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SOUND
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
DIRECT.”
to “ANALOG
CONTROL,” then 2 or 3.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “INPUT ATT.”
4. Press 2 or 3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”
When Analog Direct is turned on, the ANALOG DIRECT lamp
on the front panel button lights up.
4. Press 2 or 3 to select “ATT ON” or
– When Analog Direct turns on, “A. DIRECT” appears on the
display.
“NORMAL.”
When “ATT ON” is selected, the INPUT ATT indicator lights up
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
on the display.
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
Notes:
• When digital input mode is in use, Analog Direct is not available.
• Turning on Surround or DSP mode cancels Analog Direct and
previously selected sound adjustments are recalled.
• If Analog Direct is in use, Midnight Mode is temporarily canceled
even though adjustable.
Notes:
• This function is available when analog input terminals are in use.
• This function is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Reinforcing the Bass
• This function does not affect the sounds outputting from the
surround speakers.
• When Analog Direct is in use (see page 30), the Bass Boost
function is canceled temporarily.
You can boost the bass level.
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
On the front panel:
BASS BOOST
Press BASS BOOST to turn on Bass
Activating the Subwoofer Sound
Boost function.
The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button
lights up.
• Each time you press the button, Bass Boost
activates (“BOOST ON”) and deactivates
(“BOOST OFF”) alternately.
You can cancel the subwoofer sound even though you have
connected a subwoofer and have set “SUBWOOFER” to “YES”
(see page 22). This is useful when enjoying surround sound at night.
On the front panel:
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
From the remote control:
Press SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
to cancel the subwoofer sound
output.
Each time you press the button, the subwoofer sound output is
deactivated (“SUBWFR OFF”) and activated (“SUBWFR ON”)
alternately.
SOUND
1. Press SOUND.
The 10 keys are activated for sound
adjustments.
BASS
BOOST
2. Press BASS BOOST to turn on Bass
Boost function.
The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel
button lights up.
• Each time you press the button, the Bass Boost activates
(“BOOST ON”) and deactivates (“BOOST OFF”) alternately.
1
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
1. Press MENU.
The MENU screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SOUND
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
CONTROL,” then 2 or 3.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
1. Press MENU.
PLAY
MENU
/REW
EXIT
FF/
The MENU screen appears on
the TV.
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SUBWOOFER.”
PAUSE
SET
DOWN – TUNING – UP
CONTROL
STOP
On-screen operating
buttons
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SOUND
CONTROL,” then 2 or 3.
4. Press 2 or 3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “BASS BOOST.”
Notes:
• If you have selected “NO” for the subwoofer (see page 22), you
cannot use this function.
• When you have selected “SMALL” for the front speakers, you
cannot select “OFF” for the subwoofer even if it is set to “YES” (see
page 22).
4. Press 2 or 3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”
When Bass Boost is turned on, the BASS BOOST lamp on the
front panel button lights up.
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Surround Modes and DSP Modes
This unit activates a variety of Surround modes and DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes. To use Surround and DSP
modes properly, speakers required for creating each Surround and DSP modes should be activated.
I Surround Modes
Reproducing Theater Ambience
Introducing the Surround Modes
In a movie theater, many speakers are located on the walls to
reproduce impressive multi-surround sounds, reaching you from all
directions.
With these many speakers, sound localization and sound movement
can be expressed.
I Dolby Surround
Dolby Digital EX*
Dolby Digital EX is newly introduced surround encoding format as
an extension of multi-channel Dolby Digital, designed to add an
extra surround channel to Dolby Digital 5.1-channel (see below). By
using a matrix encoding/decoding method, additional “surround
back” channel signal is encoded (and decoded) in both the left and
right surround channel signals.
Surround modes built in this receiver can create almost the same
surround sounds as you can feel in a real movie theater.
Movie theater
Compared to the conventional Dolby Digital 5.1-channel, this newly
added surround back channel can reproduce more detailed
movements behind you while viewing the video software. In
addition, surround sound localization will become more stable, so
that you can enjoy a realistic surround field in your listening room.
Best used to reproduce multi-channel movie sound tracks of the
software encoded with Dolby Digital EX (
).
• To enjoy the software encoded with Dolby Digital EX, connect the
source component using the digital terminals on the rear of this
receiver. (See page 13.)
Dolby Digital*
Used to reproduce multi-channel sound tracks of the software
encoded with Dolby Digital (
).
D
I
G
I
T
A
L
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel encoding method (so-called discrete
5.1-channel digital audio format) records and digitally compresses
the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, left
surround channel, right surround channel, and LFE channel signals
(total 6 channels, but LFE channel is counted as 0.1 channel,
therefore, called 5.1-channel).
Since each channel is completely independent from the other
channel signals to avoid interference, you can obtain a much better
sound quality with better stereo and surround effects.
At home
Center speaker
Subwoofer
• To enjoy the software encoded with Dolby Digital, connect the
source component using the digital terminals on the rear of this
receiver. (See page 13.)
* Dolby Digital software can be roughly grouped into two categories
—multi-channel (up to 5.1-channel) and 2-channel software. To
enjoy surround sounds while playing Dolby Digital 2-channel
software, you can use Dolby Pro Logic II.
Left front speaker(s)
Right front speaker(s)
Dolby Pro Logic II*
Dolby Pro Logic II has a newly developed multi-channel playback
format to convert all 2-channel software into 5-channel (plus Subwoofer).
Matrix-based conversion method for Dolby Pro Logic II makes no
limitation for the cutoff frequency of the surround treble and enables
stereo surround sound unavailable with conventional Dolby Pro Logic.
Right surround speaker
Left surround speaker
Dolby Pro Logic II can reproduce spacious sound from original
sound without adding any new sounds and tonal colorations.
Dolby Pro Logic II has two modes—Movie mode and Music mode:
Pro Logic II Movie (PL II MOVIE)—suitable for the reproduction
DOLBY SURROUND
of Dolby Surround encoded sources bearing the mark
You can enjoy a sound field very close to the one created with
discrete 5.1-channel sounds.
.
Pro Logic II Music (PL II MUSIC)—suitable for the reproduction
of any 2-channel stereo sources. You can enjoy wide and deep sound
by using this mode. For this mode, you can make precise
adjustments to match the sound to your taste.
Surround back speaker(s)
• When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the
PRO LOGIC II
indicator lights up on the display.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic)*
DTS Digital Surround**
Used to reproduce sound tracks of the software encoded with Dolby
Used to reproduce multi-channel sound tracks of the software
DOLBY SURROUND
Surround (
).
encoded with DTS Digital Surround (
).
Dolby Surround encoding format records the left front channel,
right front channel, center channel, and surround channel signals
(total 4 channels) into 2 channels.
The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built in this receiver decodes these
2-channel signals into original 4-channel signals—matrix-based
multi-channel reproduction, and allows you to enjoy a realistic
surround sound in your listening room.
DTS Digital Surround is a discrete 5.1-channel digital audio
format available on CD, LD, and DVD software.
Compared to Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Surround format has a
lower audio compression ratio which enables it to add breadth and
depth to the sounds reproduced. As such, DTS Digital Surround
features natural, solid and clear sound.
• To enjoy the software encoded with DTS Digital Surround,
connect the source component using the digital terminals on the
rear of this receiver. (See page 13.)
• When Dolby Pro Logic is activated, the
PRO LOGIC indicator
lights up on the display.
When using Surround mode, the sounds come out of all the
connected and activated speakers.
• If only the front speakers are connected, JVC’s original 3D-
PHONIC processing (which has been developed to create the
surround effect only through the front speakers) is used.
The 3D-PHONIC indicator lights up on the display.
I DTS Digital Surround
DTS-ES Extended Surround (DTS-ES)**
This is another new digital surround encoding format, developed by
Digital Theater Systems, Inc., that adds the third surround channel—
surround back channel. (See Dolby Digital EX.)
DTS ES has two types—DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1:
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1—compatible with DTS-ES Extended
Surround (DTS-ES), which has discrete 6.1-channel. You can play
DVD MULTI Playback Mode
back the software encoded with DTS ES (
).
This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for
reproducing the analog discrete 5.1-channel output mode of the
DVD player.
You can adjust the sound reproduced by DVD MULTI playback
mode while playing back video software such as a DVD using
the analog discrete 5.1-channel output mode.
• For the connection and the details of the DVD MULTI
playback mode, see page 37.
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1—is designed to add an extra surround channel
to DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel. By using a matrix encoding/
decoding method, additional “surround back” channel signal is
encoded (and decoded) in both the left and right surround channel
signals. You can playback the software encoded with DTS-ES
(
).
• To enjoy the software encoded with DTS-ES, connect the source
component using the digital terminal on the rear of this receiver.
(See page 13.)
Note:
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, you cannot
select any Surround and DSP modes.
Neo:6**
Neo:6 is a newly developed conversion method to create
6-channel (plus subwoofer) from all 2-channel software. Neo:6 has
two modes—Neo:6 Cinema and Neo:6 Music:
*
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro
Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Neo:6 Cinema—suitable for reproduction of matrix-based 2-channel
software.
Neo:6 Music—suitable for reproduction of all 2-channel stereo
music software.
** “DTS,” “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo:6” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Reproduced software and channels for each Surround mode
Surround
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Surround
mode
Playback
software
Dolby Digital 2-channel
Dolby Surround
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel
2-channel stereo software 2-channel stereo software
Reproduced
channels
6.1-channel
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES
5.1-channel
5-channel + (subwoofer)
4-channel + (subwoofer)
Surround
mode
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1
NEO:6 CINEMA
NEO:6 MUSIC
DTS Digital Surround
Playback
software
DTS-ES
(with Matrix 6.1-channel
signals)
(with Discrete -channel
6.1
2-channel stereo software
6-channel + (subwoofer)
DTS Digital Surround
5.1-channel
signals)
Reproduced
channels
6.1-channel
6.1-channel
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I DSP Modes
DAP modes
All Channel Stereo mode (ALL STEREO)
This mode can reproduce a larger stereo sound field using all the
connected (and activated) speakers.
The sound heard in a concert hall, club, etc. consists of direct sound
and indirect sound—early reflections and reflections from behind.
Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any reflection. On
the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the distances of the
ceiling and walls (see the diagram below). These indirect sounds are
the most important elements of the acoustic surround effects.
The DAP mode can reproduce a realistic sound field by adding these
indirect sounds.
All Channel Stereo can be used when the front and surround
speakers are connected to this receiver without respect to the
center and/or surround back speakers connection.
Reflections from
behind
Early reflections
Direct sounds
Sound reproduced from normal stereo
You can use the following DAP modes in order to reproduce a more
acoustic sound field in your listening room.
HALL 1:
HALL 2:
Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a large concert
hall (where the seating capacity is about 1,000).
Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a small concert
hall (where the seating capacity is about 300).
LIVE CLUB: Gives the feeling of a live music club with a low
ceiling.
DANCE CLUB: Gives a throbbing bass beat.
PAVILION:
Gives the spacious feeling of a pavilion with a
high ceiling.
Sound reproduced from All Channel Stereo mode
JVC Theater Surround
In order to reproduce a more realistic sound field in your listening
room, you can use JVC Theater Surround.
THEATER 1: Reproduces the sound field of a large theater
(where the seating capacity is about 1,000).
3D HEADPHONE Mode
THEATER 2: Reproduces the sound field of a small theater
(where the seating capacity is about 300).
This receiver creates acoustic environment through the
headphones as though using 5 speakers by signal processing
algorithms—3D HEADPHONE mode. The processor combines
all channels except LFE channel into two encoded channels.
By turning off both the SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and
When using DAP mode or JVC Theater Surround, the sounds
come out of all the connected and activated speakers.
• If only the front speakers are connected or the front and
center speakers are connected, JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC
processing (which has been developed to create the surround
effect only through the front speakers) is used.
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 then pressing DSP, 3D HEADPHONE
mode is activated without respect to the type of software played
back. You can enjoy more natural sound as though you are
listening to directly through the conventional stereo headphones.
The DSP and HEADPHONE indicators also light up.
The 3D-PHONIC indicator lights up on the display.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Surround and DSP Modes According to the Speaker Layouts
Available Surround and DSP modes will vary depending on how many speakers are used with this receiver.
Make sure that you have set the speaker setting correctly (see page 22).
• To turn on and select Surround and DSP modes, see page 36.
Speaker layouts
6 or 7 speakers
Available SURROUND modes
Available DSP modes
THEATER 1
THEATER 2
HALL 1
Dolby Digital EX software : DOLBY D EX*
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software
: DOLBY D*
Front
speaker
Front
speaker
TV
Center speaker
HALL 2
: DOLBY D EX**
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
ALL STEREO
DTS-ES software
: ES DSCRETE*
ES MATRIX*
Surround
speaker
Surround
speaker
DTS 5.1-channel software : DTS*
: DTS NEO:6**
2-channel software
: PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC
PRO LOGIC, NEO:6CINMA
NEO:6MUSIC
Surround
back
speaker
Surround
back
speaker
Surround
back
speaker*
* When selecting “1SPK” for the surround
back speaker setting (see page 22).
5 speakers
THEATER 1
THEATER 2
HALL 1
Dolby Digital EX software : DOLBY D
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software
: DOLBY D
Front
speaker
Front
TV
speaker
Center speaker
HALL 2
DTS-ES software
DTS 5.1-channel software : DTS
2-channel software : PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC
: DTS
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
ALL STEREO
PRO LOGIC, NEO:6CINMA
NEO:6MUSIC
Surround
speaker
Surround
speaker
4 speakers
THEATER 1
THEATER 2
HALL 1
Dolby Digital EX software : DOLBY D
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software
: DOLBY D
Front
speaker
Front
speaker
TV
HALL 2
DTS-ES software
DTS 5.1-channel software : DTS
2-channel software : PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC
: DTS
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
ALL STEREO
PRO LOGIC, NEO:6CINMA
NEO:6MUSIC
Surround
speaker
Surround
speaker
3 speakers
Front
speaker
Dolby Digital EX software : DOLBY D
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software
: DOLBY D
THEATER 1
THEATER 2
HALL 1
Front
speaker
TV
Center speaker
DTS-ES software
DTS 5.1-channel software : DTS
2-channel software : PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC
: DTS
HALL 2
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
PRO LOGIC, NEO:6CINMA
NEO:6MUSIC
2 speakers
Dolby Digital EX software : DOLBY D
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software
: DOLBY D
THEATER 1
THEATER 2
HALL 1
Front
speaker
Front
speaker
TV
DTS-ES software
DTS 5.1-channel software : DTS
2-channel software : PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC
: DTS
HALL 2
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
3D H.PHONE
TV
Note
* You can select these modes by setting “EX/ES” to “AUTO” (initial setting) when the surround back speakers are set to “LARGE” or “SMALL” (see
pages 22 and 23).
**You can select these modes by setting “EX/ES” to “ON” when the surround back speakers are set to “LARGE” or “SMALL” (see pages 22 and 23).
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If Surround mode is canceled while playing back multi-channel
digital software, all channel signals are mixed and output through
the front speakers (and subwoofer if you have connected a
subwoofer and set its setting correctly—“YES”).
Activating the Surround Modes
Available Surround modes will vary depending on how many
speakers are used with this receiver.
You can also adjust digital equalization patterns and
speaker output levels and some sound parameters.
See “Adjusting Sound” on pages 38 to 42 for details.
Make sure that you have set the speaker setting correctly (see
page 22).
1. Set the analog or digital input mode for the
source you like to use and start playing.
When playing back multi-channel digital software, select the
digital input mode (see page 19).
Activating the DSP Modes
1. Select and play any sound source.
2. Press SURROUND to activate Surround mode.
• The SURROUND lamp on the front panel button lights up.
SURROUND
2. Press DSP to activate DSP mode.
The last selected DSP mode is activated.
SURROUND
• The DSP lamp on the front panel button lights up.
DSP
DSP
From the remote control
On the front panel
• When playing back multi-channel digital software, an
appropriate Surround mode will be selected according to your
setting. See “2 Selecting Channel Numbers to Reproduce
Multi-channel Digital Software” on page 23 for details.
When selecting “AUTO” (initial setting) for “EX/ES” setting,
Surround modes shown on page 35 are activated.
On the front panel
From the remote control
• Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes as follow:
THEATER 1 = THEATER 2 = HALL 1 = HALL 2 =
LIVE CLUB = DANCE CLUB = PAVILION =
ALL STEREO* =(Back to the beginning)
• If you are playing back any other software—analog, Linear
PCM, Dolby Digital 2-channel—the last selected Surround
mode is activated. Each time you press the button, Surround
mode changes as follow:
* “ALL STEREO” can be selected when the surround speakers
are set to “LARGE” or “SMALL” (see page 22).
• More than 3 speakers*
To cancel the DSP mode
PL II MOVIE = PL II MUSIC = PRO LOGIC =
NEO:6CINMA = NEO:6MUSIC = (Back to the beginning)
Press SURROUND/DSP OFF on the front panel or SURR/DSP OFF
on the remote control so that “SURR OFF” appears on the display.
DSP and Surround modes are deactivated. The DSP lamp on the
front panel button goes off.
• 2 speakers*
PL II MOVIE
“
PL II MUSIC
* See also speaker layouts on page 35.
You can also adjust digital equalization patterns,
speaker output levels and some sound parameters.
See “Adjusting Sound” on pages 38 to 42 for details.
To cancel the Surround mode
Press SURROUND/DSP OFF on the front panel or SURR/DSP
OFF on the remote control so that “SURR OFF” appears on the
display. Surround and DSP modes are deactivated. The
Note:
SURROUND lamp on the front panel button goes off.
If Analog Direct is turned on when using analog input mode (see
pages 19 and 30), currently selected Surround and/or DSP mode is
canceled temporarily.
SURROUND/DSP
OFF
SURR/DSP
OFF
On the front panel
From the remote control
Available Surround and DSP modes for each input signal
Mode
Surround
off (stereo)
DAP
modes
JVC Theater All Channel
3D
headphone
Available Surround mode
Headphone
Signals
Surround
Stereo
Dolby Digital
⅜
⅜
Dolby D EX
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
EX (6.1-channel)
(5.1-channel)
(2-channel)
Dolby D, Dolby D EX*
PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC, PRO LOGIC,
NEO:6CINMA, NEO:6MUSIC
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
DTS Digital Surround
(DTS-) ES DSCRETE, DTS
ES Discrete (6.1-channel)
ES Matrix (6.1-channel)
(5.1-channel)
⅜
⅜
(DTS-) ES MATRIX, DTS
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
DTS, DTS NEO:6*
Linear PCM
PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC, PRO LOGIC,
NEO:6CINMA, NEO:6MUSIC
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
Analog
PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC, PRO LOGIC,
NEO:6CINMA, NEO:6MUSIC
* You can select these modes by setting “EX/ES” to “ON” when the surround back speakers are set to “LARGE” or “SMALL” (see pages 22 and 23).
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the DVD MULTI Playback Mode
This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for reproducing the analog discrete output mode of the DVD
player. Before playing back a DVD, refer also to the manual supplied with the DVD player.
When using DVD MULTI playback mode, connect the DVD player with its analog discrete output jacks (Å – ‰).
DVD player
B
C
A
G
F
DVD
D
E
VIDEO
VIDEO
SUB
COMPONENVIDEO
AUDIO
CENTER
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
WOOFER
DVD
DBS
DVD
DVD
FRONT
SURR
(REAR)
TV SOUND
DBS
PHONO
OUT
(REC)
MONITOR
OUT
CD
VCR1
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TAPE
MD
Å To rear left/right channel audio output
ı To center channel audio output
Ç To subwoofer output
Î To front left/right channel audio output
‰ To composite video output
Ï To S-video output
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
VCR2
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
CDR
MONITOR
OUT
IN
(PLAY)
Ì To component video output
2. Select the analog discrete output mode on the
DVD player, and start playing a DVD.
Activating the DVD MULTI Playback Mode
• Refer also to the manual supplied with the DVD player.
1. Press DVD MULTI so that “DVD MULTI”
appears on the display.
The DVD MULTI lamp on the front panel button and the DVD
MULTI indicator light up.
You can also adjust digital equalization patterns and
speaker output levels. See “Adjusting Sound” on
pages 38 to 41 for details.
DVD MULTI
DVD MULTI
• Test tone does not output through the speakers to adjust the
speakers output levels when selecting DVD MULTI.
On the front panel
Note:
From the remote control
Notes:
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, the
Surround and DSP modes are canceled, and the SURROUND
and DSP buttons do not work.
• Midnight Mode is not available for DVD MULTI playback mode (see
page 24).
• When using a pair of headphones, the sounds of front left and right
channels are output from the headphones.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting Sound
You can adjust sound parameters to your preference after completing basic setting.
• When performing the sound adjustments, it is recommended to use the TV screen so that you can show the
on-screen display on the TV.
• When using the buttons on the front panel or remote control without using the on-screen display, you can perform
the same adjustments. (The on-screen display cannot be shown.)
• The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for about 1 minute.
Basic Procedure
You can also adjust the sound without showing menus on the TV. For details, see each explanation that follows.
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
1. Press MENU.
The MENU screen appears on the TV.
PLAY
MENU
/REW
EXIT
FF/
PAUSE
SET
DOWN – TUNING – UP
CONTROL
STOP
On-screen operating buttons
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SOUND CONTROL,” then press 2 or 3.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to select “DIGITAL EQ (Equalization),” “LEVEL ADJUST” or “EFFECT
ADJUST,” then press 2 or 3.
4. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to an item you want to set.
DIGITAL EQ (Equalization) menu
(see page 39)
SOUND CONTROL menu
LEVEL ADJUST menu (see page 40)
EFFECT ADJUST menu (see page 42)
5. Press 2 or 3 to adjust a sound parameter.
6. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.
• If Analog Direct is in use, you cannot make any sound adjustments.
• Above items shown on the on-screen display are initial values when shipped from the factory.
• Some of the items cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted. (For details, see the respective explanation in this section.)
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL
DOWN UP
2. Press CONTROL UP 5 or
Adjusting the Equalization Patterns
—DIGITAL EQ
DOWN ∞ repeatedly to adjust the
frequency level.
The DIGITAL EQ indicator lights up on the
display.
• The frequency level changes from –8 dB to
+8 dB in 2 dB steps.
You can adjust the equalization patterns to your preference.
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
1. Show DIGITAL EQ (Equalization) menu (see
page 38).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust the other
frequency levels.
To flat the equalization pattern,
set all the frequency levels to “0dB” in step 2. The DIGITAL EQ
indicator goes off from the display.
From the remote control:
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to the frequency you
want to adjust.
3. Press 2 or 3 to adjust the frequency level you
SOUND
1. Press SOUND.
want.
“SOUND” appears on the remote control display
window.
The DIGITAL EQ indicator lights up on the display.
• The frequency level changes from –8 dB to +8 dB in 2 dB
steps.
• The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other
frequency levels.
DIGITALEQ
∗
2. Press DIGITAL EQ (Equalization)
repeatedly to select the frequency you
want to adjust.
10
RETURN
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
“EQ” appears on the remote control display window.
• Each time you press the button, the frequency with its current
level changes as follows:
To flat the equalization pattern,
set all the frequency levels to “0dB” in step 3. The DIGITAL EQ
indicator goes off from the display.
EQ 1kHz
EQ 63Hz
EQ250Hz
and its level
and its level
and its level
EQ16kHZ
EQ 4kHz
and its level
and its level
On the front panel:
• “0” is the initial setting for each frequency.
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
3. Press LEVEL + or − repeatedly
+
to adjust the frequency level.
The DIGITAL EQ indicator lights up on
the display.
• The frequency level changes from
–8 dB to +8 dB in 2 dB steps.
DIGITAL
1. Press DIGITAL EQ (Equalization)
CH/ LEVEL
∗
EQ
U
repeatedly to select the frequency you
want to adjust.
• Each time you press the button, the frequency
with its current level changes as follows:
−
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other
frequency levels.
EQ 1kHz
EQ 63Hz
EQ250Hz
and its level
and its level
and its level
EQ16kHZ
EQ 4kHz
To flat the equalization pattern,
and its level
and its level
set all the frequency levels to “0dB” in step 3. The DIGITAL EQ
indicator goes off from the display.
• “0” is the initial setting for each frequency.
Notes:
• When Analog Direct is in use, the digital equalization patterns
cannot be adjusted.
• The digital equalization patterns affect the front speaker sounds
only.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
Adjusting the Speaker Output Levels
—LEVEL ADJUST
Adjustment is also possible without outputting the test tone. In this
case, you can skip steps 2, 3 and 7 below.
You can adjust the speaker output levels. The test tone can be also
output from each speaker except subwoofer to check the output level
balance when using the Surround mode.
1. Show LEVEL ADJUST menu (see page 38).
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
• When using the buttons on the front panel to adjust output level
for the Surround mode, no test tone is available.
7 Adjustable speakers
You can adjust the following speakers’ output levels within the
range of –10 dB to +10 dB (“0 dB” is the initial setting):
SUBWFR
:
Select this to adjust the subwoofer
output level.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “TEST TONE.”
FRONT L (FRNT L) :
Select this to adjust the left front
speaker output level.
3. Press 2 or 3 to select “ON” to check if you can
hear the sounds through all the speakers at equal
level.
A test tone comes out of the speakers (only if the speakers are
activated) in the following order:
CENTER
:
Select this to adjust the center
speaker output level.
FRONT R (FRNT R):
Select this to adjust the right front
speaker output level.
FRONT L (Left front speaker) = CENTER (Center speaker) =
SURR R
:
Select this to adjust the right
surround speaker output level.
FRONT R (Right front speaker)
SURR R (Right surround speaker)
=
=
S BACK R (SBK R) *:
S BACK R (Right surround back speaker)* =
S BACK L (Left surround back speaker) or
Select this to adjust the right
surround back speaker output level.
S BACK (Surround back speaker)*
=
S BACK L (SBK L)
:
:
Select this to adjust the left surround
back speaker output level.
SURR L (Left surround speaker) = (Back to the beginning)
or S BACK*
* If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker (see
page 22), “S BACK” appears instead of “S BACK L” and
“S BACK R.” No test tone outputs from the right surround back
speaker.
SURR L
Select this to adjust the left surround
speaker output level.
Note:
4. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to a speaker you want
* If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker (see
page 22), “S BACK” appears instead of “S BACK (SBK) L” and
“S BACK (SBK) R.” No test tone outputs from the right surround
back speaker.
to adjust.
5. Press 2 or 3 to adjust the speaker output level
(–10 dB to +10 dB).
• If you have selected “NO” or “NONE” for a speaker (see page
22), the output level for the corresponding speaker cannot be
adjustable.
• The center and left and right surround speakers’ output levels
are adjustable for DVD MULTI playback mode, even though
“NONE” is selected for the speaker settings.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the other speakers
output levels.
• Speaker output levels except that of the subwoofer are not
adjustable when Analog Direct is in use.
7. After the adjustment is finished, press 5 or ∞ to
move
to “TEST TONE,” then select “OFF.”
8. Press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears
from the TV.
Notes:
• If you have selected “NO” or “NONE” for a speaker (see page 22),
test tone does not come out of the corresponding speaker.
• Subwoofer output level cannot be adjusted when outputting test
tone. When you adjust the subwoofer output level, select “OFF” for
“TEST TONE.”
• Test tone does not output through the speakers when selecting
DVD MULTI.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the remote control:
SOUND
5. Press SOUND again then repeat steps 3
and 4 to adjust the other speakers
output levels.
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
TEST
6. Press TEST again to stop the test
tone.
Adjustment is also possible without outputting the test tone. In this
case, you can skip steps 2 and 6 below.
4
MEN
1. Press SOUND.
SOUND
Note:
“SOUND” appears on the remote control display
window.
• If you have selected “NO” or “NONE” for a speaker (see page 22),
test tone does not come out of the corresponding speaker.
• Subwoofer output level cannot be adjusted when
• The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.
SUBWFR
∗
outputting test tone. When you adjust the
6
TEST
2. Press TEST to check if you can
hear the sounds through all the
speakers at equal level.
subwoofer output level, press SOUND, SUBWFR
then LEVEL + or – to adjust the speaker output
level (–10 dB to +10 dB). (“S-WFR” appears on the
remote control display window.)
4
MEN
A test tone comes out of the speakers (only if the speakers are
activated) in the following order:
It is recommended to make adjustments while listening to the
sound of the source played back.
• Test tone does not output through the speakers when selecting
DVD MULTI.
FRNT L (Left front speaker) = CENTER (Center speaker) =
FRNT R (Right front speaker) =
SURR R (Right surround speaker)
=
SBK R (Right surround back speaker)* =
SBK L (Left surround back speaker) or
S BACK (surround back speaker)*
On the front panel:
=
You can also use the buttons on the front panel to adjust the speaker
output levels. However, no test tone is available when using the
buttons on the front panel. So make adjustments while listening to
the sound of the source played back.
SURR L (Left surround speaker) = (Back to the beginning)
* If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker (see
page 22), “S BACK” appears instead of “SBK L” and “SBK R.”
No test tone outputs from the right surround back speaker.
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
3. Select a speaker you want to adjust.
The selected speaker name appears on
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
MENU
∗
ENTER
∗
the remote’s display for a while.
• To select the left front speaker, press
FRONT•L. “FRL” appears on the
remote control display window.
• To select the center speaker, press
CENTER. “CTR” appears on the
remote control display window.
• To select the right front speaker,
press FRONT•R. “FRR” appears on
the remote control display window.
2
3
L
LEVEL
1. Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly to
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
ADJUST
5
6
select a speaker you want to adjust.
• Each time you press the button, the items change
as follows.
SURR•L
∗
SURR•R
8
9
Q
SBACK•L
SBACK•R
∗
∗
0
+10
100
SUBWFR (Subwoofer) = FRNT L (Left front speaker) =
CENTER (Center speaker) = FRNT R (Right front speaker) =
SURR R (Right surround speaker)
SBK R (Right surround back speaker)* =
+
FM MODE
=
SBK L (Left surround back speaker) or
S BACK (surround back speaker)*
SURR L (Left surround speaker) = (Back to the beginning)
• To select the right surround speaker, press SURR•R.
“SURRR” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the right surround back speaker, press SBACK•R.
“SBKR” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the left surround back speaker, press SBACK•L.
“SBKL” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the left surround speaker, press SURR•L. “SURRL”
appears on the remote control display window.
=
* If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker (see
page 22), “S BACK” appears instead of “SBK L” and “SBK R.”
CONTROL
2. Press CONTROL UP 5 or DOWN
DOWN
UP
∞ to adjust the speaker output
level (–10 dB to +10 dB).
Note:
If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker (see
page 22), press SBACK•L to adjust the surround back speaker
output level.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust the
other speakers output levels.
4. Press LEVEL + or – to adjust the
speaker output level (–10 dB to
+10 dB).
+
CH/ LEVEL
∗
−
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
Adjusting the Sound Parameters for the
Surround and DSP Modes—EFFECT ADJUST
1. Show EFFECT ADJUST menu (see page 38).
You can adjust the Surround and DSP sound parameters to your
preference.
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
7 Adjustable parameters
You can adjust the following parameters:
Parameters that are not adjustable for the currently
selected Surround and DSP modes are skipped.
For Surround, DAP, JVC Theater Surround and All Channel
Stereo modes (when the center speaker is connected)
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to a parameter you
CENTER TONE : Adjust the center tone. As the number
(CTR TONE)
increases, the dialogue becomes clearer so
that the human voices change from soft to
sharp. (Normally select “3.”Adjustable range:
1 to 5)
want to adjust.
3. Press 2 or 3 to adjust the parameter.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other
parameters.
For DAP modes and JVC Theater Surround
EFFECT LEVEL :
(EFFECT)
Adjust the DAP effect level. As the
number increases, the DAP effect
becomes stronger. (Normally select “3.”
Adjustable range: 1 to 5)
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
Adjust the virtual room size. As the
number increases, the interval between
reflections increases so that you will feel
as if you were in a larger room. (Normally
select “3.” Adjustable range: 1 to 5)
ROOM SIZE
(ROOMSIZE)
:
:
On the front panel:
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
Adjust the liveness effect. As the number
increases, the attenuation level of
reflections over time decreases so that
acoustics change from “Dead” to “Live.”
(Normally select “3.”Adjustable range: 1 to 5)
LIVENESS
1. Press EFFECT repeatedly to select a
EFFECT T
parameter you want to adjust.
• Each time you press the button, the items change
as follows:
EFFECT = ROOMSIZE = LIVENESS =
CTR (center) TONE = PNRAMA (Panorama) =
C (center) WIDTH = DIMENSION =
(Back to the beginning)
Note:
You can only adjust the Effect Level when using a DAP mode with
the 3D-PHONIC indicator lights up.
Parameters that are not adjustable for the currently selected
Surround and DSP modes are skipped.
For Pro Logic II Music only
Select “ON” to add “wraparound” sound
effect with side-wall image. (Initial
setting: “OFF”)
PANORAMA
(PNRAMA)
control
:
CONTROL
2. Press CONTROL UP 5 or
DOWN
UP
DOWN ∞ to adjust the sound
parameter.
Adjust the center channel localization
between the center speaker and the left/
right speakers. As the number increases, the
center channel sound moves toward the left
and right speakers. (Normally select “3.”
Adjustable range: OFF and 1 to 7)
CENTER WIDTH :
(CWIDTH)
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust the other
parameters.
Adjust sound localization position. As the
number increases, the sound localization
moves towards forward from backward.
(Normally select “4.”Adjustable range: 1 to 7)
DIMENSION
:
Note:
Parameters that are not adjustable for the currently selected Surround
and DSP modes are skipped.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPU LINK Remote Control System
The COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC’s audio components through the remote sensor on
the receiver.
To use this remote control system, you need to connect JVC’s audio
components through the COMPU LINK (SYNCHRO)-4 jacks (see
below) in addition to the connections using cables with RCA pin
plugs (see pages 8 and 9).
• Make sure that the AC power cords of these components are
unplugged before connection. Plug the AC power cords only after
all connections are complete.
Automatic Source Selection
When you press the play (3) button on a connected component or
on its own remote control, the receiver automatically turns on and
changes the source to the component. On the other hand, if you
select a new source on the receiver or on the remote control, the
selected component begins playing immediately.
In both cases, the previously selected source continues playing
without sound for a few seconds.
CD player
Automatic Power On/Off (Standby): only possible with
the COMPU LINK-3 and COMPU LINK-4
CD recorder
The connected components turn on and off (standby) along with the
receiver.
When you turn on the receiver, one of the connected components
will turn on automatically, depending on which component has been
previously selected.
Cassette deck
or
MD recorder
When you turn off the receiver, the connected components will turn
off (standby).
Synchronized Recording
Synchronized recording means the cassette deck (or MD recorder)
starts recording as soon as a CD begins playing.
COMPU LINK – 4
(SYNCHRO)
To use synchronized recording, follow these steps:
1. Put a tape in the cassette deck (or an MD in the
MD recorder), and a disc in the CD player.
Turntable
2. Press the record (¶) button and the pause (8)
button on the cassette deck (or MD recorder) at
the same time.
This puts the cassette deck (or MD recorder) into recording
pause.
If you do not press the record (¶) button and pause (8) button at
the same time, the synchronized recording feature will not
operate.
Notes:
• There are four versions of COMPU LINK remote control system.
This receiver is equipped with the fourth version—COMPU LINK-4.
This version is added systematic operations with the CD recorder to
the previous version—COMPU LINK-3.
• If your audio component has two COMPU LINK jacks, you can use
either one. If it has only one COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it
is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the
turntable or CD player in the diagram above.)
• To operate a cassette deck or MD recorder using the COMPU LINK
remote control system, set the source name correctly. (See page
17.)
3. Press the play (3) button on the CD player.
The source changes on the receiver, and as soon as play starts,
the cassette deck (or MD recorder) starts recording. When the
play ends, the cassette deck (or MD recorder) enters recording
pause, and stops about 4 seconds later.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your audio components.
Notes:
• During synchronized recording, the selected source cannot be
changed.
• If the power of any component is shut off during synchronized
recording, the COMPU LINK remote control system may not
operate properly. In this case, you must start again from the
beginning.
This remote control system allows you to use four functions listed
below.
Remote Control through the Remote Sensor on the
Receiver
You can control the connected audio components through the remote
sensor on the receiver using this remote control. Aim the remote
control directly at the remote sensor on the receiver. For details, see
pages 51 and 52.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System
The TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system has been developed to deal with the disc information recorded in the
CD Text* and MDs. Using these information in the discs, you can operate a CD player or MD recorder equipped with
the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system through the receiver.
Functions:
Connections:
This remote control system allows you to use the functions listed
below.
To use this remote control system, you need to connect a CD player
and/or MD recorder you want to operate, following the procedures
below.
Showing the Disc Information on the TV screen
1. If you have already plugged your CD player, MD
recorder, and this receiver into the AC outlets,
unplug their AC power cords first.
Disc information such as its performer and disc title (and track titles
only when a CD Text is selected) is shown on the TV screen.
Searching for a Disc: Only for the CD Player
This remote control system can allow you to search for discs by the
performer, disc title, and music genre.
With this disc search, you can easily find the disc you want to play.
2. Connect your CD player, MD recorder, and this
receiver as follows, through the COMPU LINK
jacks and TEXT COMPU LINK jacks.
Entering the Disc Information
1) COMPU LINK jacks: Use the cables with the monaural
If your CD player or MD recorder has the disc memory function,
you can input the following information about the normal audio CDs
or MDs on the TV screen.
mini-plugs (not supplied with this receiver).
• For CDs: Performer, disc title, and music genre
• For MDs:Disc title and song titles
CD player
*What is a CD Text?
MD recorder
In a CD Text, some information about the disc (its disc title, performer,
composer, arranger, etc.) is recorded.
COMPU LINK – 4
(SYNCHRO)
Notes:
• If your audio component has two COMPU LINK jacks, you can use
either one. If it has only one COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it
is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the CD
player in the diagram in the left column.)
2) TEXT COMPU LINK jacks: Use the cables with the
stereo mini-plugs (not supplied with this receiver).
• If your audio component has two TEXT COMPU LINK jacks, you
can use either one. If it has only one TEXT COMPU LINK jack,
connect it so that it is the last item in the series of components. (For
example, the CD player in the diagram in the left column.)
• “TEXT COMPULINK SOURCE NOT CONNECTED” appears on the
display in the following cases:
CD player
– When the connections explained in the left column are not
correctly done.
MD recorder
– When you try to use the TEXT COMPULINK function a few
seconds after you turn on the connected equipment.
This is not a malfunction of the units.
TEXT
COMPU LINK
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your CD player or MD
recorder.
3. Connect your CD player, MD recorder and this
receiver, using the cables with RCA pin plugs (see
page 9).
IMPORTANT:
If you turn on the receiver before turning on the other components
after connecting the components, the TEXT COMPU LINK remote
control system does not work correctly.
4. Plug the AC power cords of these components
into the AC outlets.
If this happens:
1. Turn off all the components including this receiver.
2. Turn on the connected components.
3. Turn on this receiver.
5. Turn on the connected components first, then
turn on this receiver.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Source name: CD or MD
2 Select or , then press SET to change the disc.
3 Track numbers and track titles.
Operations:
To use this remote control system, you need to connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel (see page 11), and set the
TV’s input mode to the proper position to which the receiver is
connected. Make sure you have connected a CD player or
MD recorder equipped with the TEXT COMPU LINK
remote control system. If not, you cannot use the
following functions.
• When you move
to a track number, you can
change the track information by pressing 2 or 3.
Each time you press the button, track information
alternates between its track title and its performer.
(You can also start playing the track by pressing SET.)
4 Select this (move
in front), then press SET to go to
the DISC SEARCH screen (see page 46).
5 Select this (move
in front), then press SET to go to
the TITLE INPUT screen (see page 47).
6 This appears only when a CD Text is selected.
7 Disc information such as the disc title, performer, and
music genre.
On-Screen Operating buttons (on the remote control)
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
When this is selected (
in front), you can change the
When you press TEXT DISPLAY,
“MENU” appears on the remote
display window.
disc information by pressing 2 or 3. Each time you
press the button, disc information (see “Note on 7”)
changes.
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR1
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
8 Select
or
, then press SET to change the track.
CDR
9 Usable buttons and their functions for the current
selection.
VCR2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND
DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF
INPUT
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
Indication here will be changed according to what is
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
2
3
MENU
SOUND
currently selected (
on 9.”
in front) on the screen. See “Note
TEST
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
4
5
6
ENTER
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
7/P
8
9
MUTING DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
+10
10
0
TEXT
DISPLAY
+
100
RETURN FM MODE
PLAY
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
EXIT
MENU
Note on 7:
+
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
TV/VIDEO
The following information will appear on the display:
• For CD Texts—Disc title, Performer, Genre, Song writer, Composer,
Arranger, Message
Only recorded information will be shown. If there is no data, “NO
DATA” will appear.
−
−
−
EXIT
TEXT
DISPLAY
/REW
FF/
PLAY
PAUSE
SET
MENU
REC
PAUSE
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
DOWN – TUNING
–
UP
SLEEP
DOWN – TUNING – UP
CONTROL
STOP
• For MDs—Disc title
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
If there is no data, “NO DATA” will appear.
STOP
Note on 9:
For example, the SET button will be used to start play (PLAY), to go to
the next screen (ENTER), and to determine the selection (ENTER).
To exit from the Disc information screen
Press EXIT.
Showing the Disc Information on the TV
Screen
Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” or “MD” is
selected as the source.
Notes:
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
• The on-screen display will disappear in the following cases:
– if no operation is done for about 10 minutes.
– if you do any operation other than explained in this section.
• To control an MD recorder using the TEXT COMPU LINK remote
control system, you have to change the source name shown on the
display from “TAPE” to “MD.” (See page 17.)
• Some special characters and marks cannot be displayed correctly.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Search for a disc by its disc title:
Searching for a Disc (Only for the CD player)
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
Search for a disc by its performer:
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SEARCH,” then
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SEARCH,” then
press SET.
The DISC SEARCH screen
appears.
press SET.
The DISC SEARCH screen
appears .
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “DISC TITLE,”
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “PERFORMER”,
then press SET.
The DISC TITLE SEARCH
screen appears.
then press SET.
The PERFORMER SEARCH
screen appears.
4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the
4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the
first character of the disc title you want to search
for, then press SET.
To correct the incorrect entry, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
first character of the performer you want to
search for, then press SET.
To correct the incorrect entry, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the correct character, then press SET.
in front of the correct character, then press SET.
Note:
Note:
Symbols such as @, # or $ are not be available for search.
Symbols such as @, # or $ are not be available for search.
5. Press SET again.
Disc search starts, then the
SEARCH RESULT screen,
showing the disc titles,
appears.
5. Press SET again.
Disc search starts, then the
SEARCH RESULT screen,
showing the performers,
appears.
6. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the
following:
6. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the
following:
• Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5 or
• Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5 or
∞ to move
to a searched-for disc, then press 2 or 3. Each
∞ to move
to a searched-for disc, then press 2 or 3. Each
time you press 2 or 3, the disc information alternates
between its performer and its disc title.
time you press 2 or 3, the disc information alternates
between its performer and its disc title.
• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information
• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information
screen (see page 45): Press 5 or ∞ to move
to a
screen (see page 45): Press 5 or ∞ to move
to a
searched-for disc, then press SET.
searched-for disc, then press SET.
• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are
listed as a result of the search): Press 5 or ∞ until they
appear.
• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are
listed as a result of the search): Press 5 or ∞ until they
appear.
• Going back to the DISC TITLE SEARCH screen: Press
EXIT.
• Going back to the PERFORMER SEARCH screen: Press
EXIT.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Search for a disc by its genre:
Entering the Disc Information
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
For the CD Player with the disc memory function:
You can use the disc memory function through this receiver.
The disc information (its performer, disc title, and music genre) of
normal audio CDs will be stored into the memory built in the CD
player.
For the disc memory function, refer to the manual supplied with
your CD player.
• The performer, disc title, and music genre information are usually
recorded in a CD Text. However, if a CD Text has no genre
information recorded on the disc itself, you can input its music
genre by yourself.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SEARCH,” then
press SET.
The DISC SEARCH screen
appears.
Note:
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “GENRE”, then
You can enter the TITLE INPUT screens for a CD Text and input its
titles. However, you cannot store the titles you have input for a CD
Text.
press SET.
The GENRE SEARCH screen
appears.
Example: Entering the following information for Disc 1
Performer: “MICHAEL”
Disc title: “MY FAVORITE”
4. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to the genre you
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
want to search for, then
press SET.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “TITLE INPUT,”
To show the unseen genres,
press 5 or ∞ until they
appear.
then press SET.
The TITLE INPUT/
PERFORMER screen appears.
Disc search starts, then the
SEARCH RESULT screen
showing the disc titles appears.
3. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of a
5. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the
following:
character you want, then press SET to enter the
character.
• Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5
• If the current CD is a CD Text, go to step 5 without entering
or ∞ to move
to a searched-for disc, then press 2 or 3.
the performer.
Each time you press 2 or 3, the disc information alternates
between its performer and its disc title.
To use the lower case letters, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to
To use the upper case letters again, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
move to , then press SET.
, then press SET.
• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information
screen (see page 45): Press 5 or ∞ to move
to a
searched-for disc, then press SET.
• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are
listed as a result of the search): Press 5 or ∞ until they
appear.
• Going back to the GENRE SEARCH screen: Press EXIT.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the MD recorder:
4. Repeat step 3 until you
finish putting a
You can write the disc information (disc title and song titles) onto
the disc. You can only write the song title for the song currently
selected.
• If you have the CD-MD combination deck, you can also enter the
disc information (its performer, disc title, and its music genre) of
normal audio CDs into the memory built in the CD-MD
combination deck. (To do this, follow the procedure of “For the
CD Player with the disc memory function” on page 47.)
• If you change the disc or song title with more than 32 characters,
the characters following 32nd will be erased from the title.
performer name (up to
32 characters).
To insert a space, press 5 / ∞
/ 2 / 3 to move
to
,
then press SET.
To correct an incorrect character:
1) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to + or =, then press
SET until the incorrect character is selected.
2) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to erase the character.
3) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to
, then press SET
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “MD” is selected as
the source.
in front of the correct
character, then press SET to enter the correct character.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
5. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “TITLE INPUT,”
move
to “DISC 1:
MICHAEL (in this
example),” then press
SET.
then press SET.
The DISC TITLE INPUT
screen appears.
The TITLE INPUT/DISC
TITLE screen appears.
6. Enter the disc title,
referring to steps 3 and
3. Enter the title,
referring to steps 3 and
4 of “For the CD Player
with the disc memory
function.”
• You can enter up to 32
characters for the disc title.
4.
• If the current CD is a CD
Text, go to the next step
without entering the disc
title.
7. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
move
to “DISC 1:
move
to the disc title
MY FAVORITE (in this
example),” then press
SET.
The TITLE INPUT/DISC 1
GENRE screen appears.
you have just entered,
then press SET.
The disc title is stored into the
memory, and the SONG
TITLE INPUT screen for the
currently selected song
8. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to the genre you want,
appears.
• You can enter a song title for the song currently selected.
then press SET.
The Disc Information screen appears again.
5. Enter the song title, referring to steps 3 and 4 of
“For the CD Player with the disc memory
function.”
To show the unseen genres, press 5 or ∞ until they appear.
• You can enter up to 32 characters for the song title.
6. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to the song title
you have just entered, then press SET.
The song title is stored into the memory, and the Disc
Information screen appears again.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC’s video components (TV, VCR, and DVD player)
through the receiver.
This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which adds a function to operate JVC’s video components through the video
components terminals. To use this remote control system, you need to connect the video components you want to operate, following the
diagrams below and the procedure on the next page.
CONNECTIONS 1: AV COMPU LINK Connection
VCR 1
(VCR connected to
VCR 1 jacks)
DVD player
TV
AV
VHS
COMPU LINK-ΙΙΙ
DVD
CAUTION:
AV
COMPU LINK
You can only connect to the TV
with the AV COMPU LINK EX or
AV COMPU LINK-III jack. DO
NOT connect to the TV with AV
COMPU LINK RECEIVER/AMP
jack.
AV
AV
COMPU LINK
COMPU LINK EX
AV
COMPU LINK-ΙΙΙ
IMPORTANT:
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the
DBS tuner connected to the TV SOUND/DBS and DBS component
video jacks, and video components connected to the VIDEO and
VCR 2 jacks on the receiver.
Notes:
• When connecting the receiver and a TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use automatic
selection of TV’s input mode (see page 50).
• When connecting only the VCR 1 or DVD player to this receiver, connect it directly to the receiver using cables with the monaural mini-plugs.
CONNECTIONS 2: Video Cable Connection
This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals—S-video, composite video, and component video, and the signals coming
into this receiver through one type of video jacks can output only through the jack of the same type. So you need to connect the VCR and/or
DVD player to the TV using one of the following three ways:
• When using the AV COMPULINK remote control system, set the component video input for the DVD player and the DBS tuner
correctly (see “7 Setting the Component Video Input” on page 25); otherwise, the correct input for this receiver will not be selected on
the TV.
CASE 1
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver through the S-video jacks, connect this receiver
to the TV’s Video Input 1 jack using S-video cables.
Source
Equipment
RX-8020VBK
TV
S-video cable
S-video cable
To Video Input 1
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver through the composite video jacks, connect this
receiver to the TV’s Video Input 2 jack (composite video input) using composite video cables.
CASE 2
Source
Equipment
RX-8020VBK
TV
Composite
video cable
Composite
video cable
To Video Input 2
(Composite)
CASE 3
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver through the component video jacks, connect this
receiver to the TV’s Video Input 2 jack (component video input) using component video cables.
Source
Equipment
RX-8020VBK
TV
Component
video cable
Component
video cable
To Video Input 2
(Component)
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One-Touch DVD Play
1. If you have already plugged your VCR 1 (VCR
connected to the VCR 1 jacks), DVD player, TV
and this receiver into the AC outlets, unplug their
AC power cords first.
Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the
DVD playback without setting other switches manually.
• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input jacks
on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the receiver
automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD” or
“DVD MULTI.”
• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input
terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
2. Connect your VCR 1, DVD player, TV and this
receiver, using the cables with the monaural mini-
plugs (not supplied).
• See “CONNECTIONS 1” on the previous page.
3. Connect the audio input/output jacks on VCR 1,
DVD player, TV and this receiver using the cables
with RCA pin plugs.
Automatic Selection of TV’s Input Mode
• See pages 10 to 12.
• When you select “TV” as the source to play on the receiver, the
TV automatically changes the input mode to the TV tuner so that
you can watch TV.
• When you select “DVD,” “DVD MULTI,” “VCR 1,” “VCR 2,”
“VIDEO” or “DBS” as the source to play on the receiver, the TV
automatically changes the input mode to the appropriate position
(either Video Input 1 or Video Input 2) so that you can view the
playback picture.
4. Connect the video input/output jacks on VCR 1,
DVD player, TV and this receiver, using the
cables with RCA pin plugs, S-video plug or
component video plugs.
• See “CONNECTIONS 2” on the previous page.
5. Plug the AC power cords of the components and
the receiver into the AC outlets.
Notes:
• When you select “TV” as the source on the receiver, you cannot
see the menu on the TV screen since the AV COMPU LINK remote
control system automatically changes the TV’s input mode to the
TV tuner.
If you do not mind stopping listening to the TV sounds, you can
then show the on-screen displays after changing the TV’s input
mode to the appropriate position (either Video Input 1 or Video
Input 2).
6. When turning on the TV for the first time after
the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV
volume to the minimum using the TV volume
control on the TV.
• This function does not work when you connect this receiver and the
TV with the AV COMPU LINK using the TV’s AV COMPU LINK EX
terminal. In this case, reconnect the TV referring to case 1 or case 2
on page 49.
7. Turn on the connected components first, then
turn on this receiver.
• When turning on the VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1
jacks), use the remote control supplied with this receiver
(press VCR1
).
Automatic Power On/Off
The TV, VCR 1 (the VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), and DVD
player turn on and off along with the receiver.
When you turn on the receiver;
• If the previously selected source is “VCR 1,” the TV and VCR 1
will turn on automatically.
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use the
five basic functions listed below.
Remote Control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR Using
This Remote Control
• If the previously selected source is “DVD” or “DVD MULTI,” the
TV and DVD player will turn on automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “VIDEO,” “VCR 2,” “TV” or
“DBS,” only the TV will turn on automatically.
See page 53 for details.
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each
target component.
When you turn off the receiver, the TV, VCR 1 and the DVD player
will turn off.
One-Touch Video Play
Note:
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the
VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), you can enjoy the
video playback without setting other switches manually. The
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to “VCR 1.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the play
(3) button on the VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks) or on
the remote control. So, you can get the same result.
If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR 1, the VCR 1
will not turn off, but continue recording.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating JVC’s Audio/Video Components
You can operate JVC’s audio and video components with this receiver’s remote control, since control signals for JVC’s
components are preset in the remote control.
Tuner
Operating Audio Components
You can always perform the following operations:
IMPORTANT:
FM/AM
:Alternate between FM and AM.
To operate JVC’s audio components using this remote control:
• You need to connect JVC’s audio components through the
COMPU LINK (SYNCHRO) jacks (see page 43) in addition to
the connections using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 8 and
9).
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the
receiver.
• If you use the buttons on the front panel to choose a source, the
remote control will not operate that source. To operate a source
with the remote control, the source must be selected using source
selecting buttons on the remote control.
After pressing FM/AM, you can perform the following operations:
1 – 10, +10
:Select a preset channel number directly.
For channel number 5, press 5.
For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.
For channel number 20, press +10, then 10.
:Tune into stations.
TUNING UP/DOWN
FM MODE
:Change the FM reception mode.
Sound control section (Amplifier)
You can always perform the following operations:
• To operate a cassette deck or MD recorder using the COMPU
LINK remote control system, set the source name correctly. (See
page 17.)
SURROUND
DSP
:Turn on and select Surround modes
:Turn on and select DSP modes.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your components.
SURR/DSP OFF
:Turn off Surround and DSP modes.
After pressing SOUND, you can perform the following operations:
FRONT•L then LEVEL +/–
:Adjust the left front speaker output
level. “FRL” appears on the display.
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
FRONT•R then LEVEL +/– :Adjust the right front speaker output
level. “FRR” appears on the display.
CENTER then LEVEL +/–
SURR•L then LEVEL +/–
SURR•R then LEVEL +/–
SBACK•L then LEVEL +/–
:Adjust the center speaker output level.
“CTR” appears on the display.
:Adjust the left surround speaker output
level. “SURRL” appears on the display.
:Adjust the right surround speaker output
level. “SURRR” appears on the display.
:Adjust the left surround back speaker
output level. “SBKL” appears on the
display.
:Adjust the right surround back speaker
output level. “SBKR” appears on the
display.
:Adjust the subwoofer output level.
“S-WFR” appears on the display.
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
DVD
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
TV/DBS
CDR
VCR1
VCR2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF
INPUT
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
2
3
MENU
SOUND
TEST
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
ENTER
4
5
6
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
SBACK•R then LEVEL +/–
SUBWFR then LEVEL +/–
7/P
8
9
MUTING DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
+10
10
0
+
100
RETURN FM MODE
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
+
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
TV/VIDEO
−
MENU
−
−
EXIT
TEXT
DISPLAY
PLAY
DIGITAL EQ then LEVEL+/– :Select the audio band and adjust its
frequency level. “EQ” appears on the
display.
:Turn on or off the test tone output.
:Turn on or off Bass Boost function.
REC
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
PAUSE
DOWN – TUNING – UP
SLEEP
TEST
BASS BOOST
CONTROL
STOP
Note:
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
After adjusting sounds, press the corresponding source selecting
button to operate your target source by using the 10 keys; otherwise,
the 10 keys cannot be used for operating your target source.
Note:
When you press one of the source selecting buttons, the
operation mode appears on the display window. For example,
the above illustration shows the remote control now works for
CD operation.
CD player
After pressing CD, you can perform the following operations on the
CD player:
Buttons
FM/AM
CD
Indications
TUNER
CD
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the current (or previous)
track.
CDR
CDR
¢
:Skip to the beginning of the next track.
:Stop playing.
:Pause playing. To resume press 3 PLAY.
:Select a track number directly.
For track number 5, press 5.
PHONO
TAPE/MD
PHONO
TAPE
VCR 1
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
1 – 10, +10
TAPE
CDR
CONTROL (repeatedly)*
SOUND
CDDSC
SOUND
* By pressing CONTORL repeatedly, you can select “VCR1,”
“TAPE,” “CDR” or “CDDSC” as the source.
For track number 15, press +10, then 5.
For track number 20, press +10, then 10.
For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD changer
1 – 10, +10
:Select a track number directly.
For track number 5, press 5.
After selecting “CDDSC” by pressing CONTROL repeatedly, you
For track number 15, press +10, then 5.
For track number 20, press +10, then 10.
For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
:Enter recording pause by pressing this button.
To start recording again, press this button then
3 PLAY.
can perform the following operations on a CD changer:
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) track.
REC PAUSE
¢
:Skip to the beginning of the next track.
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume press 3 PLAY.
:Select the number of a disc installed in a CD
changer.
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
1 – 6, 7/P
Note:
You can use either CDR or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed
above. If you press CDR, the playing source also changes. On the
other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “CDR,” the
playing source does not change.
After pressing CD, you can perform the following operations on the
CD changer:
1 – 10, +10
:Select a track number directly.
For track number 5, press 5.
Cassette deck
For track number 15, press +10, then 5.
For track number 20, press +10, then 10.
For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
After pressing TAPE/MD (or selecting “TAPE” by pressing
CONTROL repeatedly), you can perform the following operations
on a cassette deck:
Example:
3 PLAY
REW
FF
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
REC PAUSE
:Start playing.
• Selecting disc number 4, track number 12, and starting playback.
1. Press CONTROL repeatedly until “CDDSC” appears on
the display window, then press 4.
:Fast wind the tape from right to left.
:Fast wind the tape from left to right.
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume, press 3 PLAY.
:Enter recording pause by pressing this button.
To start recording again, press this button then
3 PLAY.
2. Press CD, then press +10, 2.
If your CD changer is of 200-disc loading capability (except for
XL-MC100 and XL-MC301),
you can do the following operations using the number buttons after
pressing CD.
Notes:
• When you use a cassette deck, change the source name
connected to TAPE/MD jacks correctly (see page 17).
• You can use either TAPE/MD or CONTROL to activate the buttons
listed above. If you press TAPE/MD, the playing source also
changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to
select “TAPE,” the playing source does not change.
1. Select a disc number.
2. Then select a track number (always enter two digits).
3. Start playback.
Examples:
• Selecting disc number 3, track number 2, and starting playback.
Press 3, then, 0, 2, then 3 PLAY.
• Selecting disc number 10, track number 5, and starting playback.
Press 1, 0, then, 0, 5, then 3 PLAY.
• Selecting disc number 105, track number 12, and starting
playback. Press 1, 0, 5, then 1, 2 then 3 PLAY.
MD recorder
After pressing TAPE/MD (or selecting “TAPE*” by pressing
CONTROL repeatedly), you can perform the following operations
on the MD recorder:
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) track.
:Skip to the beginning of the next track.
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume, press 3 PLAY.
:Enter recording pause by pressing this button.
To start recording again, press this button then
3 PLAY.
Turntable
After pressing PHONO, you can perform the following operations
on a turntable:
¢
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
REC PAUSE
3 PLAY
7 STOP
:Start playing.
:Stop playing.
CD recorder
After pressing CDR (or selecting “CDR” by pressing CONTROL
repeatedly), you can perform the following operations on a CD
recorder:
Notes:
• When you use an MD recorder, change the source name
connected to TAPE/MD jacks correctly (see page 17).
• You can use either TAPE/MD or CONTROL to activate the buttons
listed above. If you press TAPE/MD, the playing source also
changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to
select “TAPE*,” the playing source does not change.
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) track.
:Skip to the beginning of the next track.
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume press 3 PLAY.
¢
* Selecting “TAPE” will allow you to control the MD recorder.
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks)
Operating Video Components
You can always perform the following operations:
VCR1
:Turn on or off the VCR 1 (VCR connected to
the VCR 1 jacks).
IMPORTANT:
To operate JVC’s video components using this remote control:
• You need to connect JVC’s video components through the AV
COMPU LINK jacks (see page 49) in addition to the connections
using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 10 to 12).
• Some JVC’s VCRs can accept two types of the control signals—
remote code “A” and “B.” Before using this remote control, make
sure that the remote control code of the VCR connected to the VCR 1
jacks is set to code “A.”
– When another JVC’s VCR is connected to the VCR 2 or VIDEO
terminals, set its remote control code to code “B.” (This remote
control cannot emit the control signals of code “B.”)
• When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at
the remote sensor on each component, not on the receiver.
After pressing VCR1 (or selecting “VCR1” by pressing CONTROL
repeatedly), you can perform the following operations on the VCR 1
(VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks):
1 – 9, 0
3 PLAY
REW
:Select the TV channels on a VCR.
:Start playing.
:Rewind a tape.
FF
:Fast wind a tape.
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
REC PAUSE
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume press 3 PLAY.
:Enter recording pause by pressing this button.
To start recording again, press this button then
3 PLAY.
CH +/–
:Change the TV channels on the VCR.
Note:
You can use either VCR1 or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed
above. If you press VCR1, the playing source also changes. On the
other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “VCR1,” the
playing source does not change.
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
DVD player
DVD
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
TV/DBS
CDR
After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI, you can perform the
following operations on a DVD player:
VCR1
VCR2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF
INPUT
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) chapter.
:Skip to the beginning of the next chapter.
:Stop playing.
:Pause playing. To resume press 3 PLAY.
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
TEST
2
3
MENU
SOUND
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
ENTER
4
5
6
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
¢
7/P
8
9
MUTING DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
+10
10
0
+
100
RETURN FM MODE
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
+
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
TV/VIDEO
−
MENU
−
−
EXIT
∗FRONT•R
∗FRONT•L
TEXT
DISPLAY
After pressing DVD or DVD
MULTI, these buttons can be used
for the DVD menu operations.
PLAY
2
∗CENTER
5
3
REC
PAUSE
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
MENU
TEST
∗SUBWFR
DOWN – TUNING – UP
SLEEP
4
6
ENTER
Note:
CONTROL
STOP
∗SURR•L
For detailed menu operations, refer
to the instructions supplied with the
discs or the DVD player.
8
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
TV
Note:
You can always perform the following operations:
When you press one of the source selecting buttons, the
operation mode appears on the display window. For example,
the above illustration shows the remote control now works for
VCR 1 operation.
TV
:Turn on or off the TV.
:Adjust the volume.
:Set the input mode (either TV or VIDEO).
TV VOL +/–
TV/VIDEO
Buttons
VCR 1
DVD or DVD MULTI
TV/DBS
Indications
VCR1
DVD
After pressing TV/DBS, you can perform the following operations
on a TV:
TV
CH +/–
1 – 9, 0, 100+ :Select the channels.
RETURN :Alternate between the previously selected
channel and the current channel.
:Change the channels.
VCR 1
TAPE
CDR
CONTROL (repeatedly)*
CDDSC
* By pressing CONTORL repeatedly, you can select “VCR1,”
“TAPE,” “CDR” or “CDDSC” as the source.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Other Manufacturers’ Video Equipment
This remote control supplied with the receiver can transmit control
signals for other manufacturers’ TVs, CATV converters, DBS
tuners, VCRs and DVD players. By changing the transmittable
signals from preset ones to the other manufacturers’, you can
operate the other manufacturers’ components using this remote
control.
To change the transmittable signals for
operating another manufacturer’s TV
1. Press and hold TV
2. Press TV/DBS.
.
When operating the other manufacturers’ components, refer also to
the manuals supplied with them. To operate these components with
the remote control, first you need to set the manufacturers’ codes for
each TV, CATV converters, DBS tuners VCR and DVD players.
“CALL” appears on the remote control display window.
3. Enter a manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
See the list below to find the code.
After replacing batteries for the remote control, you need to set the
4. Release TV
.
manufactures’ codes again.
The following buttons can be used for operating the TV:
TV
:Turn on and off the TV.
:Adjust the volume.
:Set the input mode (either TV
or VIDEO).
TV VOL +/–
TV/VIDEO
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
After pressing TV/DBS, you can perform the following
operations on the TV:
CH +/–
1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10) :Select the channels.
The 10 key will function as the
:Change the channels.
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
DVD
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
ENTER button if your TV requires
pressing ENTER after selecting a
channel number.
TV/DBS
CDR
VCR1
VCR2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF
INPUT
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
2
3
Notes:
MENU
SOUND
TEST
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
4
5
6
• Refer also to the manual supplied with your TV.
• All the functions listed above may not be assigned to the
buttons for some TVs.
• If you cannot change the channels of some TVs by pressing
number buttons, press CH +/– for changing the channels.
ENTER
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
7/P
8
9
MUTING DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
+10
10
0
+
100
RETURN FM MODE
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
+
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
TV/VIDEO
−
−
−
EXIT
5. Try to operate your TV by pressing TV
.
TEXT
DISPLAY
PLAY
MENU
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
REC
PAUSE
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
DOWN – TUNING – UP
SLEEP
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of TV,
CONTROL
STOP
try each one until the correct one is entered.
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
Manufacturer
Codes
Manufacturer
Codes
JVC
00*, 02, 13,
14, 47, 74
01, 02
QUELLE
52, 53, 54, 55,
56, 57, 58, 59,
60, 61, 62, 63,
64, 65, 66, 67
08, 24, 29, 30,
31, 48
32, 33, 68, 69,
70
06, 08, 16, 34,
35, 49
AKAI
Note:
BLAUPUNKT 03, 04,
FISHER
When you press one of the source selecting buttons, the
operation mode appears on the display window. For example,
the above illustration shows the remote control now works for
TV operation.
01, 05
03, 06, 07
08, 09, 10, 49 SABA
02
11, 12
RCA/
PROSCAN
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
IRADDIO
ITT/NOKIA
LOEWE
SAMSUNG
Buttons
TV/DBS
CATV/DBS CONTROL
VCR1
Indications
TV
CATV
VCR1
06, 15, 16
MAGNAVOX 08, 17, 49
METS
MITSUBISHI 08, 18, 19, 20 SHARP
MIVAR 21 SONY
NORDMENDE 22, 23
OKANO 15
PANASONIC 24, 25, 26, 27 TOSHIBA
SANYO
01, 05
50, 51, 52, 53 SCHNEIDER 02, 15, 36
37, 38, 77
39
DVD or DVD MULTI
DVD
TELEFUNKEN 40, 41, 42, 69
THOMSON
71, 72
37, 43, 44
45, 46
76
ZENITH
PHILIPS
15, 17, 28, 75
*Initial setting
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they
are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For CATV converter
Manufacturer Codes
To change the transmittable signals for
operating a CATV converter or DBS tuner
GENERAL INSTRUMENT 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14, 29
1. Press and hold CATV/DBS
.
HAMLIN/REGAL
JERROLD
01, 02, 03, 04, 05
06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14
15, 16, 17
18, 19, 20
21, 22
2. Press CATV/DBS CONTROL.
“CALL” appears on the remote control display window.
3 Enter a manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
OAK
PANASONIC
PIONEER
See the following lists to find the code.
4. Release CATV/DBS
.
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
TOCOM
23, 24, 25
26
The following buttons can be used for operating the CATV
converter and DBS tuner:
ZENITH
27, 28
CATV/DBS
:Turn on and off the CATV converter
or DBS tuner.
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they
are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.
CH +/–
:Change the channels.
1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10) :Select the channels.
The 10 key will function as the
ENTER button if your equipment
requires pressing ENTER after
selecting a channel number.
To change the transmittable signals for
operating another manufacturer’s VCR
Note:
1. Press and hold VCR1
2. Press VCR1.
.
Refer also to the manual supplied with your CATV converter or
DBS tuner.
“CALL” appears on the remote control display window.
5. Try to operate your CATV converter or DBS
3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
tuner by pressing CATV/DBS
.
When your CATV converter or DBS tuner turns on or off, you
have entered the correct code.
See the list on the next page to find the code.
4. Release VCR1
.
The following buttons can be used for operating the VCR:
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of
CATV converter or DBS tuner, try each one until the correct
one is entered.
VCR1 :Turn on and off the VCR.
After pressing VCR1, you can perform the following operations
on the VCR:
Note:
You cannot preset the signals for both the CATV converter and DBS
tuner at the same time.
CH +/–
:Change the TV channels on the
VCR.
1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10) :Select the TV channels.
The 10 key will function as the
ENTER button if your VCR requires
pressing ENTER after selecting a
channel number.
For DBS tuner
Manufacturer
Codes
JVC
56*, 57, 67
43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49
30
50, 51, 67
31
32, 33
48, 52, 53, 54, 55
AMSTRAD
BLAUPUNKT
ECHOSTAR
GOLDSTAR
GRUNDIG
HIRSHMANN
INSTRUMENT
ITT/NOKIA
KATHREIN
NEC
3 PLAY
REW
:Start playback.
:Rewind a tape.
FF
:Fast wind a tape.
7 STOP
8 PAUSE:
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume press
3 PLAY.
68
34
REC PAUSE
:Enter recording pause by pressing
this button.
52, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63
35, 36
48
37, 38
65
To start recording again, press this
button then 3 PLAY.
ORBITECH
PHILIPS
Note:
RCA
SAMSUNG
SCHWAIGER
SIEMENS
SONY
39, 40
61, 64
41, 42
66
Refer also to the manual supplied with your VCR.
5. Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR1
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
.
TECHNISAT
48
*Initial setting
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of
VCR, try each one until the correct one is entered.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manufacturer
JVC
AIWA
BELL & HOWELL
BLAUPUNKT
CGM
EMERSON
FISHER
Codes
∗FRONT•R
∗FRONT•L
After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI,
these buttons can be used for the
DVD menu operations.
00*, 26, 27, 28, 29, 58
2
∗CENTER
5
3
MENU
01, 02
03
04, 05
06, 07
TEST
∗SUBWFR
4
6
ENTER
Note:
∗SURR•L
For detailed menu operations, refer to
the instructions supplied with the
discs or the DVD player.
8
08, 10, 11, 12, 64, 65
03, 14, 15, 16, 17
FUNAI
01
GE
18, 19, 20
07
13, 21
06, 22
18, 23, 24, 25, 66
07, 21
Note:
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
Refer also to the manual supplied with your DVD player.
5. Try to operate your DVD player by pressing one
of the above buttons.
LOEWE
• DO NOT forget to turn on the DVD player before pressing
one of the above buttons.
MAGNAVOX
MITSUBISHI
NEC
NOKIA
NORDMENDE
ORION
04, 19, 24
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35
26, 27
03, 36
38
09
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of
DVD, try each one until the correct one is entered.
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
RCA/PROSCAN
SABA
19, 24, 39, 40
04, 19, 21, 24, 41, 42
21
04, 18, 19, 23, 24, 43, 44, 45
38, 46
Manufacturer
Codes
JVC
00*, 02
01
DENON
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SHARP
SIEMENS
SONY
TELEFUNKEN
TOSHIBA
ZENITH
45, 47, 59, 61, 62, 63
03, 48, 49
37, 50
03, 51
52, 53, 54
55, 60
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
03
13
04, 05, 06
07
SAMSUNG
SONY
08
43, 44
56, 57
09
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA
10
*Initial setting
11, 12
*Initial setting
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they
are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they
are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.
To change the transmittable signals for
operating another manufacturer’s DVD player
1. Press and hold AUDIO
2 Press DVD.
.
“CALL” appears on the remote control display window.
3. Enter a manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
See the following list to find the code.
4. Release AUDIO
.
After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI, you can perform the
following operations on the DVD player:
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the
current (or previous) chapter.
:Skip to the beginning of the next
chapter.
¢
7 STOP
:Stop playing.
8 PAUSE
:Pause playing. To resume press 3
PLAY.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC’s
service center.
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
The display does not light up.
The power cord is not plugged in.
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. (See page
15.)
No sound from speakers.
Speaker signal cables are not connected.
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if necessary.
(See pages 6 to 8.)
The SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 buttons are not
set correctly.
Press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2
correctly. (See page 18.)
An incorrect source is selected.
Muting is activated.
Select the correct source.
Press MUTING to cancel the mute. (See page 20.)
An incorrect input mode (analog or
digital) is selected.
Select the correct input mode (analog or digital).
(See page 19.)
Connections are incorrect.
Check connections.
For analog connections, see pages 8 to 12.
For digital connections, see page 13.
For USB connection, see page 14.
Sound from one speaker only.
Speaker signal cables are not connected
properly.
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if necessary.
(See pages 6 to 8.)
The balance is set to one extreme.
Adjust the balance properly. (See page 40.)
No sound from PC connected with a USB
cable.
An electrical shock is applied to the
receiver, PC, or USB cable.
Turn off the receiver once, then turn it on again and
restart application installed in the PC.
USB device is not selected on the
computer.
Select “USB Audio Device [1]” for “Playback” of
“Audio.” (See page 14.)
Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC.
“Mute” is selected on the PC.
Check if the volume is set at low level.
Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC.
Noise while reproducing PC sound
connected with a USB cable.
Strong electromagnetic wave is emitted
from a nearby device such as TV
Move the PC away from the device such as TV
emitting strong electromagnetic wave.
Sound from PC connected with a USB
cable is intermittent.
PC is subjected to excessive load due to
using other applications.
Close the applications you do not use.
Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM
reception.
Incoming signal is too weak.
Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact your
dealer. (See page 5.)
The station is too far away.
An incorrect antenna is used.
Select a new station.
Check with your dealer to be sure you have the
correct antenna.
Antennas are not connected properly.
Ignition noise from automobiles.
Check connections. (See pages 5 and 6.)
Occasional cracking noise during FM
reception.
Move the antenna further from automobile traffic.
Noise is heard while playing a record.
A ground cable from the turntable is not
connected to the screw marked (H) on
the rear panel.
Connect the cable to the screw marked (H) on the
rear panel.
Howling during record playing.
Your turntable is too close to the
speakers.
Move the speakers away from the turntable.
Turn off the Analog Direct. (See page 30.)
No sound effect such as Surround mode,
DSP mode and digital equalization.
The Analog Direct is turned on.
6.1-channel reproduction cannot be done
for Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES
software.
Software or setting is not for Dolby
Digital EX or DTS ES software.
Play back software bearing the mark
.
Set “EX/ES” setting to “AUTO.” (See page 23.)
or
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
1.Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
“OVERLOAD” starts flashing on the
Speakers are overloaded because of
high volume.
display.
turn off the receiver.
2.Stop the playback source.
3.Turn on the receiver again, and adjust the volume.
Speakers are overloaded because of
short circuit of speaker terminals.
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn
off the receiver, then check the speaker wiring.
If “OVERLOAD” does not disappear, unplug the AC
power cord, then plug it back again.
If speaker wiring is not short-circuited, contact your
dealer.
The STANDBY lamp lights up after
turning on the power, and soon the
receiver turns off again (into standby
mode).
The receiver is overloaded because of a
high voltage.
Press STANDBY/ON
off the receiver. After unplugging the AC power
cord, consult your dealer.
on the front panel to turn
Remote control does not work.
There is an obstruction between the
remote sensor on the receiver and the
remote control.
Remove the obstruction.
Batteries are weak.
Replace batteries. (See page 15.)
Remote control does not work intendedly.
An incorrect remote control operation
mode is selected.
Select the correct remote control operation mode.
(See pages 51 to 53.)
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Amplifier
Output Power:
At Stereo operation:
Front channels:
120 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω,
20 Hz to 20 kHz, with no more than 0.08% total
harmonic distortion.
At Surround operation:
Front channels:
100 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no
more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Center channel:
100 W, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no more than
0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Surround channels:
100 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no
more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Audio
Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance (1 kHz):
PHONO (MM):
2.5 mV/47 kΩ
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:
200 mV/47 kΩ
Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)* :
Coaxial: DIGITAL 1 (DVD):
Optical: DIGITAL 2 (CD), DIGITAL 3 (TV), DIGITAL 4 (CDR):
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω
*Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital Surround (with
sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).
USB:
Revision 1.0, full-speed (with sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz)
Audio Output Level:
Recording Output Level:
Digital output:
PRE OUT
1.0 V
VCR 1, VCR 2, CDR, TAPE/MD:
Optical: DIGITAL OUTPUT:
200 mV
Signal wave length: 660 nm
Output level: –21 dBm to –15 dBm
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/’78 IHF):
PHONO:
70 dB/78 dB (at REC OUT)
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:
92 dB/80 dB
Frequency Response (8 Ω):
PHONO:
20 Hz to 20 kHz ( 1 dB)
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:
20 Hz to 100 kHz (+1 dB, –3 dB)
USB:
20 Hz to 20 kHz (+1 dB, –3 dB)
RIAA Phono Equalization:
Bass boost:
1.0 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
+6 dB 1.0 dB at 100 Hz
Video
Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Composite video:
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS:
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-video:
(Y: luminance):
(C: chrominance, burst): 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(Y: luminance):
(PB/PR):
Component video:
DVD, DBS:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Video Output Level:
Composite video:
S-video:
VCR 1, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT:
VCR 1, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(Y: luminance):
(C: chrominance, burst): 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(Y: luminance):
(PB/PR):
Component video:
MONITOR OUT:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Synchronization:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
On-Screen System:
Negative
45 dB
NTSC
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM tuner (IHF)
Tuning Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
Monaural:
12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Monaural:
Stereo:
21.3 dBf (3.2 µV/75 Ω)
41.3 dBf (31.5 µV/75 Ω)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A weighted):
Total Harmonic Distortion:
Monaural:
Stereo:
78 dB at 85 dBf
73 dB at 85 dBf
Monaural:
Stereo:
0.4% at 1 kHz
0.6% at 1 kHz
Stereo Separation at REC OUT:
Alternate Channel Selectivity:
Frequency Response:
35 dB at 1 kHz
45 dB: ( 400 kHz)
30 Hz to 15 kHz: (+0.5 dB, –3 dB)
AM tuner
Tuning Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
Loop antenna
400 µV/m
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
50 dB (100 mV/m)
General
Power Requirements:
Power Consumption:
AC 120V , 60 Hz
320 W/440 VA (at operation)
2 W (in standby mode)
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Mass:
435 mm x 156.5 mm x 425 mm
(17 3/16 in. x 6 3/16 in. x 16 3/4 in.)
11.8 kg (26.1 lbs)
Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Authorized Service Centers
®
QUALITY
SERVICE
HOW TO LOCATE YOUR JVC SERVICE CENTER
TOLL FREE: 1 (800) 537-5722
http://www.jvc.com
Dear Customer,
In order to receive the most satisfaction from your purchase,please read the instruction booklet before
operating the unit.In the event that repairs are necessary, please call 1 (800)537-5722 for your nearest
authorized servicer or visit our website at www.JVC.com
Remember to retain your Bill of Sale for Warranty Service.
Do not service the television yourself
Caution
To prevent electrical shock,do not open the cabinet.There are no user serviceable
parts inside.Please refer to qualified service personnel for repairs.
Accessories
To purchase accessories for your JVC product,please call toll free:1 (800)882-2345 or
on the web at www.JVC.com
BT-51002-5
(0301)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIMITED WARRANTY
AUDIO-2
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA warrants this product and all parts thereof, except as set forth below ONLY TO THE
ORIGINAL PURCHASER AT RETAIL to be FREE FROM DEFECTIVE MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP from the date
of original retail purchase for the period as shown below. ("The Warranty Period")
PARTS
LABOR
2 YRS
2 YRS
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS VALID ONLY IN THE FIFTY (50) UNITED STATES, THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA AND
IN COMMONWEALTH OF PUERTO RICO.
WHAT WE WILL DO:
If this product is found to be defective, JVC will repair or replace defective parts at no charge to the original owner.
Such repair and replacement services shall be rendered by JVC during normal business hours at JVC authorized service
centers. Parts used for replacement are warranted only for the remainder of the Warranty Period. All products and parts
thereof may be brought to a JVC authorized service center on a carry-in basis except for Television sets having a screen
size 25 inches and above which are covered on an in-home basis.
WHAT YOU MUST DO FOR WARRANTY SERVICE:
Return your product to a JVC authorized service center with a copy of your bill of sale. For your nearest JVC authorized
service center, please call toll free: (800) 537-5722.
If service is not available locally, box the product carefully, preferably in the original carton, and ship, insured, with
a copy of your bill of sale plus a letter of explanation of the problem to the nearest JVC Factory Service Center, the
name and location of which will be given to you by the toll-free number.
If you have any questions concerning your JVC Product, please contact our Customer Relations Department.
WHAT IS NOT COVERED:
This limited warranty provided by JVC does not cover:
1. Products which have been subject to abuse, accident, alteration, modification, tampering, negligence, misuse, faulty
installation, lack of reasonable care, or if repaired or serviced by anyone other than a service facility authorized by
JVC to render such service, or if affixed to any attachment not provided with the products, or if the model number
or serial number has been altered, tampered with, defaced or removed;
2. Initial installation and installation and removal for repair;
3. Operational adjustments covered in the Owner's Manual, normal maintenance, video and audio head cleaning;
4. Damage that occurs in shipment, due to act of God, and cosmetic damage;
5. Signal reception problems and failures due to line power surge;
6. Video Pick-up Tubes/CCD Image Sensor, Cartridge, Stylus (Needle) are covered for 90 days from the date of purchase;
7. Batteries (except that Rechargeable Batteries are covered for 90 days from the date of purchase);
There are no express warranties except as listed above.
THE DURATION OF ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, IS
LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY HEREIN.
JVC SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT, INCONVENIENCE, LOSS OR ANY OTHER
DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGE
TO TAPES, RECORDS OR DISCS) RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS PRODUCT, OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH
OF THIS WARRANTY. ALL EXPRESS AND IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-
ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE WARRANTY PERIOD SET FORTH ABOVE.
Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages or limitations on how long an
implied warranty lasts, so these limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific
legal rights and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
JVC COMPANY OF AMERICA
DIVISION OF JVC AMERICAS CORP.
1700 Valley Road
Wayne, NJ 07470
REFURBISHED PRODUCTS CARRY A SEPARATE WARRANTY, THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT APPLY. FOR DETAILS OF
REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY, PLEASE REFER TO THE REFURBISHED PRODUCT WARRANTY INFORMATION
PACKAGED WITH EACH REFURBISHED PRODUCT.
For customer use:
Enter below the Model No. which is located either on the rear, bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this information
for future reference.
Model No. :
Serial No. :
Purchase data :
Name of dealer :
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
J
C
0302NHMMDWJEIN
V
EN
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
RECEPTEUR DE COMMANDE AUDIO/VIDEO
RX-8020VBK
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR1
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
CDR
VCR 2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND
DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF INPUT
RX-8020V AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
TEST
2
3
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM PRESET
FM MODE
MEMORY
MENU
SOUND
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
ENTER
4
5
6
STANDBY
MASTER VOLUME
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
7/P
8
9
STANDBY/ON
MUTING DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
+10
10
0
+
100
RETURN FM MODE
SPEAKERS ON/OFF
1
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR
1
VCR
2
VIDEO
TV SOUND/DBS
SURROUND/DSP
OFF
INPUT
DIGITAL LEVEL
EQ ADJUST
+
+
+
SURROUND
DSP
ANALOG/DIGITAL
ANALOG DIRECT
BASS BOOST
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
2
TV/VIDEO
INPUT ATT
−
−
−
EXIT
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
SOUCE NAME
FM/AM
TEXT
DISPLAY
PLAY
EFFECT SETTING
CONTROL
MENU
USB AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE/MD
USB AUDIO
REC
PAUSE
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
PUSH OPEN
DOWN
UP
SOURCE NAME
DOWN
–
TUNING
–
UP
SLEEP
STOP CONTROL
PHONES
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
INSTRUCTIONS
For Customer Use:
MANUAL D’INSTRUCTIONS
Enter below the Model No. and Serial
No. which are located either on the rear,
bottom or side of the cabinet. Retain this
information for future reference.
Model No.
Serial No.
LVT0870-002A
[C]
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warnings, Cautions and Others/
Mises en garde, précautions et indications diverses
CAUTION
Note to CATV system installer:
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Section 820-40 of the NEC which provides guidelines
for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable
ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the
building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.
CAUTION:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK.
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK)
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
"dangerous voltage" within the product's
enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
Declaration of Conformity
Model Number:
Trade Name:
Responsible Party:
Address:
RX-8020VBK
JVC
JVC Americas Corp.
1700 Valley Road, Wayne
New Jersey 07470
973-315-5000
The exclamation point within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the appliance.
Telephone Number:
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE
OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE
THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.
Déclaration de conformité
Numéro de modèle:
RX-8020VBK
JVC
Nom de marque:
Personne responsable: US JVC CORP.
Adresse:
1700 Valley Road
Wayne, N.J. 07470
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of electrical shocks, fire, etc.:
1. Do not remove screws, covers or cabinet.
2. Do not expose this appliance to rain or moisture.
ATTENTION
Afin d’éviter tout risque d’électrocution, d’incendie, etc.:
1. Ne pas enlever les vis ni les panneaux et ne pas ouvrir le
coffret de l’appareil.
Numéro de téléphone: (973) 315-5000
Cet ensemble se conforme à la partie 15 des règles de la FCC
(Federal Communications Commission), Le fonctionnement est sujet
aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) Cet appareil ne peut pas causer d’interférences nuisibles, et (2)
cet appareil doit accepter toute interférence reçue, comprenant
des interférences qui peuvent causer un mauvais fonctionnement.
2. Ne pas exposer l’appareil à la pluie ni à l’humidité.
Caution –– STANDBY/ON
Disconnect the mains plug to shut the power off completely. The
STANDBY/ON button in any position does not disconnect
the mains line. The power can be remote controlled.
button!
Attention –– Commutateur STANDBY/ON
Déconnecter la fiche de secteur pour couper complètement le
courant. Le commutateur STANDBY/ON ne coupe jamais
!
complètementlalignedesecteur, quellequesoitsaposition. Le
courant peut être télécommandé.
Caution –– SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch!
Match the position of SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch on
the back panel to the impedance of the speaker connected, to
protect from overheating.
G-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Canada/pour Le Canada
THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS
B LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL
APPARATUS AS SET OUT IN THE INTERFERENCE-CAUSING
EQUIPMENT STANDARD ENTITLED “DIGITAL APPARATUS,”
ICES-003 OF THE DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.
CET APPAREIL NUMERIQUE RESPECTE LES LIMITES DE
BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS
NUMERIQUES DE CLASSE B PRESCRITES DANS LA NORME
SUR LE MATERIEL BROUILLEUR; “APPAREILS
NUMERIQUES”, NMB-003 EDICTEE PAR LE MINISTRE DES
COMMUNICATIONS.
For Canada/pour le Canada
CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE
BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT
ATTENTION: POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES,
INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA
BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER
JUSQUAU FOND
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
manufacturer for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Caution: Proper Ventilation
Attention: Ventilation Correcte
To avoid risk of electric shock and fire and to protect from damage.
Locate the apparatus as follows:
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, l’incendie et tout autre dégât.
Disposer l’appareil en tenant compte des impératifs suivants
Front:
Sides:
Top:
Back:
Bottom:
No obstructions open spacing.
Avant:
Rien ne doit gêner le dégagement
Laisser 10 cm de dégagement latéral
Laisser 10 cm de dégagement supérieur
Laisser 15 cm de dégagement arrière
Rien ne doit obstruer par dessous; poser l’appareil
sur une surface plate.
No obstructions in 10 cm from the sides.
No obstructions in 10 cm from the top.
No obstructions in 15 cm from the back
No obstructions, place on the level surface.
Flancs:
Dessus:
Arrière:
Dessous:
In addition, maintain the best possible air circulation as illustrated.
Veiller également à ce que l’air circule le mieux possible comme
illustré.
Spacing 15 cm or more
Dégagement de 15 cm
ou plus
RX-8020VBK
Wall or obstructions
Mur, ou obstruction
Front
Avant
Stand height 15 cm or more
Hauteur du socle: 15 cm ou plus
Floor
Plancher
G-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Introduction................................................ 2 Setting Sound ........................................... 30
Features ...................................................................................... 2
Precautions ................................................................................. 2
Attenuating the Input Signal .................................................... 30
Turning Analog Direct On and Off .......................................... 30
Reinforcing the Bass ................................................................ 31
Activating the Subwoofer Sound ............................................. 31
Parts Identification...................................... 3
Getting Started........................................... 5
Using Surround Modes and DSP Modes ........ 32
Before Installation ...................................................................... 5
Checking the Supplied Accessories ........................................... 5
Connecting the FM and AM Antennas ....................................... 5
Connecting the Speakers ............................................................ 6
Connecting Audio/Video Components ....................................... 8
7 Analog Connections ............................................................... 8
7 Digital Connections .............................................................. 13
7 USB Connection ................................................................... 14
Connecting the Power Cord ..................................................... 15
Putting Batteries in the Remote Control .................................. 15
7 Surround Modes ................................................................... 32
Reproducing Theater Ambience ................................................ 32
Introducing the Surround Modes ............................................. 32
7 DSP Modes ........................................................................... 34
Available Surround and DSP Modes According to
the Speaker Layouts ........................................................... 35
Activating the Surround Modes ............................................... 36
Activating the DSP Modes ....................................................... 36
Using the DVD MULTI Playback Mode .......... 37
Basic Operations ....................................... 16
Activating the DVD MULTI Playback Mode .......................... 37
Turning On the Power .............................................................. 16
Selecting the Source to Play ..................................................... 16
Adjusting the Volume ............................................................... 18
Selecting the Front Speakers .................................................... 18
Listening Only with Headphones ............................................. 18
Selecting the Analog or Digital Input Mode ............................ 19
Muting the Sound ..................................................................... 20
Changing the Display Brightness ............................................. 20
Using the Sleep Timer .............................................................. 20
Adjusting Sound ........................................ 38
Basic Procedure ........................................................................ 38
Adjusting the Equalization Patterns—DIGITAL EQ ............... 39
Adjusting the Speaker Output Levels—LEVEL ADJUST ...... 40
Adjusting the Sound Parameters for the Surround and
DSP Modes—EFFECT ADJUST ...................................... 42
COMPU LINK Remote Control System ......... 43
TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System .. 44
Basic Settings........................................... 21
7 Showing the Disc Information on the TV Screen................. 45
7 Searching for a Disc (Only for the CD player) .................... 46
7 Entering the Disc Information .............................................. 47
Basic Procedure ........................................................................ 21
1 Setting the Speakers ........................................................... 22
2 Selecting Channel Numbers to Reproduce
Multi-channel Digital Software ................................... 23
3 Setting the Speaker Distance ............................................. 23
4 Setting the Bass Sounds ..................................................... 24
5 Setting the Dynamic Range ............................................... 24
6 Setting the Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminals ........... 25
7 Setting the Component Video Input ................................... 25
8 Memorizing the Volume Level for Each Source ................ 26
9 Showing the Text Information on the Display ................... 26
AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System .... 49
Operating JVC’s Audio/Video Components ... 51
Operating Audio Components .................................................. 51
Operating Video Components .................................................. 53
Operating Other Manufacturers’ Video
Equipment ............................................ 54
Troubleshooting......................................... 57
Specifications............................................ 59
Receiving Radio Broadcasts ........................ 27
Tuning into Stations Manually ................................................. 27
Using Preset Tuning ................................................................. 27
Selecting the FM Reception Mode........................................... 28
Operating the Tuner Using the On-Screen Display.................. 29
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
We would like to thank you for purchasing one of our JVC products.
Before operating this unit, read this manual carefully and thoroughly to obtain the best possible performance
from your unit, and retain this manual for future reference.
Features
Precautions
Dolby Digital EX*
Power sources
Dolby Digital EX is newly introduced surround encoding format
as an extension of multi-channel Dolby Digital, designed to add
an extra surround channel to Dolby Digital 5.1-channel. By using
a matrix encoding/decoding method, additional “surround back”
channel signal is encoded (and decoded) in both the left and right
surround channel signals.
• When unplugging the receiver from the wall outlet, always pull
the plug, not the AC power cord.
• Do not handle the AC power cord with wet hands.
• If you are not going to operate the receiver for an extended period
of time, unplug the AC power cord from the wall outlet.
Ventilation
DTS-ES Extended Surround (DTS-ES)**
High power amplifiers built in this receiver will generate heat inside
the cabinet. For safety, observe the following carefully.
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor
ventilation could overheat and damage the receiver.
DTS-ES is another new format developed by Digital Theater
Systems, Inc., adding a surround back channel on the basis of
DTS Digital Surround.
• Do not block the ventilation openings or holes. (If the ventilation
openings or holes are blocked by a newspaper or cloth, etc., the
heat may not be able to get out.)
Dolby Pro Logic II*
Dolby Pro Logic II converts all 2-channel stereo software,
especially Dolby Surround encoded software, into 5-channel
(plus subwoofer) signals. It reproduces realistic Surround sounds
approaching to Dolby Digital 5.1-channel. Dolby Pro Logic II has
two modes to reproduce—Movie mode and Music mode.
Others
• Should any metallic object or liquid fall onto the unit, unplug the
unit and consult your dealer before operating any further.
• Do not expose this apparatus to rain, moisture, dripping or
splashing and that no objects filled with liquids, such as vases
shall be placed on the apparatus.
Neo:6**
Neo:6 can reproduce realistic Surround fields by converting
2-channel stereo software into 6-channel (plus subwoofer) signals.
Neo:6 has two modes to reproduce—Neo:6 Cinema and Neo:6
Music.
• Do not disassemble the unit since there are no user serviceable
parts inside.
If anything goes wrong, unplug the AC power cord and consult your
JVC dealer.
DAP (Digital Acoustic Processor)
Sound field simulation technology allows precise ambience
recreation of existing theaters and halls. Thanks to the high-
performance DSP (Digital Signal Processor) and high-capacity
memory, you can enjoy 5.1-channel surround by playing
2-channel or multi-channel software.
Multi-channel headphone virtual surround
sound—3D HEADPHONE
The built-in headphone virtual surround system is compatible with
Multi-channel software like Dolby Digital, DTS Surround, etc.
Thanks to the new signal processing algorithms used by the high-
performance DSP, you can enjoy a natural surround sound through
the headphones.
COMPU LINK/TEXT COMPU LINK/AV COMPU
LINK remote control systems
These COMPU LINK remote control systems allow you to
operate other JVC’s audio/video components from this receiver.
*
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro
Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
** “DTS,” “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo:6” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parts Identification
Become familiar with the buttons and controls on the receiver before use.
Refer to the pages in parentheses for details.
Front Panel
1
2
3 4
67 8
9
pq w
r
t
y
5
e
RX-8020V AUDIO/VIDEO CONTROL RECEIVER
FM/AM TUNING
FM/AM PRESET
FM MODE
MEMORY
DGTL AUTO
DVD MULTI
PRO LOGIC
TUNED STEREO
L
C
R
ANALOG
LINEAR PCM
DIGITAL
STANDBY
DSP 3D PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE
-
MASTER VOLUME
SUBWFR LFE
HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONETOUCH OPERATION
AUTO MUTING
LS
S
RS
SB
STANDBY/ON
SPEAKERS
1
2
SLEEP VOLUME
SPEAKERS ON/OFF
1
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR
1
VCR
2
VIDEO
TV SOUND/DBS
SOURCE NAME
DIGITAL LEVEL
EQ ADJUST
SURROUND/DSP
OFF
INPUT
SURROUND
DSP
ANALOG/DIGITAL
ANALOG DIRECT
2
INPUT ATT
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
EFFECT SETTING
CONTROL
BASS BOOST
USB AUDIO
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE
/
MD USB AUDIO
FM / AM
DOWN
UP
SOURCE NAME
PHONES
d
u i o ;
a
s
f
g
h
U
S
B
A
U
D
IO
Display Window
S-VIDEO
PUSH OPEN
VIDEO
VIDE
O
3
8
1
2
4
6
7
9
-
5
0
L—
AUDIO—R
DGTL AUTO
DVD MULTI
PRO LOGIC
3D - PHONIC
TUNED STEREO
MIDNIGHT MODE
L
C
R
ANALOG
DSP
SUBWFR LFE
LINEAR PCM
DIGITAL
HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONETOUCH OPERATION
AUTO MUTING
LS
S
RS
When using the VIDEO input terminals
and/or USB AUDIO terminal on the front
panel, detach the terminal cover.
SB
SPEAKERS 1 2
SLEEP
VOLUME
=
~
!
&
@
#
$ %^
f
g
h
SOURCE NAME buttons (17)
CONTROL UP 5/DOWN ∞ buttons (21, 41, 42)
BASS BOOST button and lamp (31)
Front Panel
1
2
STANDBY/ON
button and STANDBY lamp (16)
• SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 button (18)
• SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 button (18)
FM/AM TUNING 5 / ∞ buttons (27)
DSP button and lamp (36)
FM/AM PRESET 5 / ∞ buttons (27, 28)
SURROUND/DSP OFF button (36)
FM MODE button (28)
MEMORY button (27)
Display window (16)
EFFECT button (42)
DIGITAL EQ (equalization) button (39)
Remote sensor (15)
LEVEL ADJUST button (41)
SETTING button (21)
MASTER VOLUME control (18)
ANALOG DIRECT button and lamp (30)
PHONES jack (18)
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF button (31)
SURROUND button and lamp (36)
USB AUDIO terminal (14)
Display Window
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
o
;
a
s
1
2
3
4
5
6
ANALOG indicator (19)
Speaker indicators and signal indicators (17)
DGTL (digital) AUTO indicator (19)
DVD MULTI indicator (37)
DSP indicator (18, 34)
•
•
PRO LOGIC indicator (33)
PRO LOGIC II indicator (32)
7
8
9
0
-
=
~
!
@
#
$
%
^
&
3D-PHONIC indicator (33, 34)
MIDNIGHT MODE indicator (24)
TUNED indicator (27)
STEREO indicator (27, 28)
ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator (26)
Digital signal format indicators (19)
SPEAKERS 1/2 indicators (18)
Main Display
HEADPHONE indicator (18, 34)
DIGITAL EQ (equalization) indicator (39)
INPUT ATT (attenuator) indicator (30)
SLEEP indicator (20)
VIDEO input jacks (10)
• INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL button (19)
• INPUT ATT button (30)
AUTO MUTING indicator (28)
VOLUME level indicator (16, 20)
d
Source selecting buttons and lamps (16, 17, 19, 27, 28, 37)
DVD MULTI, DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, PHONO,
CD, CDR, TAPE/MD, USB AUDIO, FM/AM
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Control
Remote Control
1
2
Display window
buttons (16, 53 – 56)
CATV/DBS , VCR1
, TV
, AUDIO
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
3
Source selecting buttons (16, 17, 19, 27, 28, 37)
DVD, DVD MULTI, CD, FM/AM, TV/DBS, VIDEO, CDR, PHONO,
VCR1, VCR2, TAPE/MD, USB
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
p
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
i
SURROUND button (36)
DSP button (36)
ANALOG DIRECT button (30)
SOUND button (31, 39, 41)
DIMMER button (20)
MUTING button (20)
CATV/DBS CONTROL button (55)
TV/VIDEO button (53)
TEXT DISPLAY button (45 – 48)
MENU button (21, 29 – 31, 38)
REC PAUSE button (52, 53, 55)
SLEEP button (20)
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT button (19)
SURR (surround)/DSP OFF button (36)
• 10 keys for operating tuner (28)
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
2
DVD
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
TV/DBS
CDR
3
VCR1
VCR2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF
INPUT
4
5
y
u
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
2
3
6
7
8
MENU
SOUND
TEST
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
4
5
6
ENTER
i
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
• 10 keys for adjusting sound (31, 39, 41)
• 10 keys for operating audio/video components (51 – 55)
• CH (channel) +/– buttons (53 – 55)
• LEVEL +/– buttons (39, 41)
7/P
8
9
DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
MUTING
∗
∗
∗
+10
100
10
0
9
o
+
RETURN FM MODE
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
o
;
These buttons function only after pressing 10 keys which are marked with
an asterisk (*).
p
q
+
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
TV/VIDEO
;
a
s
d
VOLUME +/– buttons (18)
−
MENU
−
−
TEXT
DISPLAY
TV VOL (volume) +/– buttons (53, 54)
EXIT button (21, 30, 31, 38, 40, 42, 45 – 47)
• TUNING UP /DOWN buttons (27)
• On-screen operating buttons (21, 29 – 31, 38 – 40, 42, 45 – 48)
• Operating buttons for audio/video components (51 – 53, 55, 56)
CONTROL button (51 – 53)
a
s
PLAY
EXIT
w
e
r
REC
PAUSE
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
d
f
DOWN – TUNING – UP
SLEEP
f
t
CONTROL
STOP
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
Remote control display window
Remote control display window
1
Remote control operation mode display (16)
• Remote control operation mode such as “DVD,” “CD,” “SOUND,” etc.
appears.
1
2
When the remote control operation mode changes, it is shown on the
display.
2
Signal transmission indicator
• Lights up when transmitting the remote control signals.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started
This section explains how to connect audio/video components and speakers to the receiver, and how to connect the
power supply.
Before Installation
General Precautions
Connecting the FM and AM Antennas
FM Antenna Connections
• Be sure your hands are dry.
• Turn the power off to all components.
• Read the manuals supplied with the components you are going to
connect.
ANTENNA
ANTENNA
FM
A
B
75
75
L
L
FM
XIA
XIA
A
A
O
O
C
C
Locations
• Install the receiver in a location that is level and protected from
moisture.
AM
EXT
AM
EXT
AM
O
AM
O
P
P
LO
LO
• The temperature around the receiver must be between –5˚C and
35˚C (23˚F and 95˚F ).
• Make sure there is good ventilation around the receiver. Poor
ventilation could cause overheating and damage the receiver.
FM Antenna (supplied)
Extend the supplied FM antenna horizontally.
ANENNA
FM 75
COAXIAL
Handling the receiver
• Do not insert any metal object into the receiver.
• Do not disassemble the receiver or remove screws, covers, or
cabinet.
• Do not expose the receiver to rain or moisture.
AM
LOOP
Outdoor FM Antenna Cable (not
supplied)
Checking the Supplied Accessories
AM
EXT
Check to be sure you have all of the following items, which are
supplied with the receiver.
The number in the parentheses indicates quantity of the pieces
supplied.
A. Using the Supplied FM Antenna
The FM antenna provided can be connected to the FM 75 Ω
COAXIAL terminal as temporary measure.
• Remote Control (1)
B. Using the Standard Type Connector (Not Supplied)
A standard type connector should be connected to the FM 75 Ω
COAXIAL terminal.
• Batteries (2)
• AM Loop Antenna (1)
• FM Antenna (1)
Note:
If reception is poor, connect the outdoor FM antenna (not supplied).
Before attaching a 75 Ω coaxial cable (the kind with a round wire
going to an outdoor antenna), disconnect the supplied FM antenna.
If anything is missing, contact your dealer immediately.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AM Antenna Connections
Connecting the Speakers
ANTENNA
Turn the loop until you have
the best reception.
You can connect the following speakers:
FM 75
COAXIAL
• Two pairs of front speakers to produce normal stereo sound.
• One pair of surround speakers to enjoy the surround effect.
• One surround back speaker or one pair of surround back speakers
to enjoy 6.1-channel sound reproduction.
• One center speaker to produce more effective surround effect (to
emphasize human voices).
• One subwoofer to enhance the bass.
AM Loop Antenna
(supplied)
AM
LOOP
AM
EXT
IMPORTANT:
Snap the tabs on the loop into the
slots of the base to assemble the
AM loop.
After connecting the speakers listed above, set the speaker
setting information properly to obtain the best possible
Surround and DSP effect. For details, see page 22.
2
1
3
CAUTION:
Use speakers with the SPEAKER IMPEDANCE indicated by the
speaker terminals.
Typical speaker layout
Outdoor single vinyl-covered wire (not supplied)
Notes:
• If the AM loop antenna wire is covered with vinyl,
remove the vinyl by twisting it as shown in the
diagram.
Center speaker
Subwoofer
• Make sure the antenna conductors do not touch any other
terminals, connecting cords and power cord. This could cause poor
reception.
• If reception is poor, connect an outdoor single vinyl-covered wire
(not supplied) to the AM EXT terminal. (Keep the AM loop antenna
connected.)
Left front speaker(s)
Right front speaker(s)
Right surround speaker
Left surround speaker
Surround back speaker(s)
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic connecting procedure
1 Cut, twist and remove the insulation at the end of
each speaker signal cable (not supplied).
2
1
4
3
2 Turn the knob counterclockwise.
3 Insert the speaker signal cable.
4 Turn the knob clockwise.
For each speaker (except for a subwoofer), connect the (+) and
(–) terminals on the rear panel to the (+) and (–) terminals
marked on the speakers.
Connecting the front, center and surround speakers
Surround
IMPORTANT:
Front speakers 1
speakers
Front speakers 2
Right / Left
Right / Left
Right / Left
To obtain the best possible output power from the
receiver, and to prevent the receiver from being
overheated, the receiver has the SPEAKER LOAD
SELECTOR which has to be set as follows:
Center speaker
• Set it to “HIGH” when the impedance of the front
speakers connected is within the range of 8 Ω to 16 Ω.
• Set it to “LOW” when the impedance of the front
speakers connected is within the range of 4 Ω to 6 Ω.
CAUTION : SPEAKER IMPEDANCE 8 16
+
+
–
+
Note:
CAUTION :
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
You can connect two pairs of front
speakers (one pair to the FRONT
SPEAKERS 1 terminals, and another pair
to the FRONT SPEAKERS 2 terminals).
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
4
6
LOW
8
16 HIGH
–
–
RIGHT
LEFT
1
2
SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR
CENTER
SPEAKER
SURROUND SPEAKERS
FRONT SPEAKERS
Note:
Connecting the surround back speakers
If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker quantity
(see page 22), connect the surround back speaker to the PRE OUT
SURR BACK L (left) jack.
To fully enjoy Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES Extended Surround
(see pages 32 and 33), you need to connect the surround back
speakers through a power amplifier connected to the PRE OUT
SURR BACK jacks on the rear panel, using a cable with RCA pin
plugs (not supplied). Connect the white plug to the audio left jack,
and the red plug to the audio right jack.
Connecting the subwoofer speaker
You can enhance the bass by connecting a subwoofer.
Connect the input jack of a powered subwoofer to the PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER jack on the rear panel, using a cable with RCA pin
plugs (not supplied).
Power amplifier
PRE OUT
FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
L
Left surround
back speaker
Right surround
back speaker
L
R
R
SUBWOOFER
Powered
subwoofer
PRE OUT
FRONT CENTER SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
Note:
You can place a subwoofer wherever you like since bass sound is
non-directional. Normally place it in front of you.
R
R
SUBWOOFER
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Enhancing your audio system
Connecting Audio/Video Components
You can use this receiver as the pre-amplifier (control amplifier)
when you connect power amplifiers to the PRE OUT jacks on the
rear panel using cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, and the red plug to the
audio right jack.
You can connect the following audio/video components to this
receiver. Refer also to the manuals supplied with your components.
Audio Components
Video Components
• VCRs (VCR 1 and VCR 2)
• Video camera
• Turntable
Left front
speaker
Right front
speaker
• CD player*
• Cassette deck or
MD recorder*
• TV*
• DBS tuner*
• CD recorder*
• DVD player*
• Personal computer (PC)
Power amplifier
Center speaker
*
You can connect these components using the methods described in
“Analog Connections” (see below) and in “Digital Connections” (see
page 13).
Analog Connections
Power amplifier
Audio component connections
Use the cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, and the red plug to the
audio right jack.
CAUTION:
If you connect a sound-enhancing device such as a graphic equalizer
between the source components and this receiver, the sound output
through this receiver may be distorted.
PRE OUT
FRONT CENER SURR
SURR BACK
L
L
Turntable
R
R
SUBWOOFER
SUB
AUDIO
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
WOOFER
DVD
SURR
(REAR)
Turntable
PHONO
Power
amplifier
CD
To audio
output
OUT
(REC)
TAPE
MD
IN
(PLAY)
If a ground cable is
OUT
provided for your turntable,
connect the cable to the
screw marked (H) on the
rear panel.
(REC)
Power amplifier
CDR
IN
(PLAY)
Note:
This connection is for the turntable with an MM (moving-magnet) type
cartridge.
Any turntables incorporating a small-output cartridge such as an MC
(moving-coil) type must be connected to this receiver through a
commercial head amplifier or step-up transformer. Direct connection
may result in insufficient volume.
Left surround
speaker
Right surround
speaker
Left / Right
Surround back speakers
Note:
If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker quantity
(see page 22), connect the surround back speaker to the SURR
BACK L (left) jack.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD player
CD recorder
SUB
AUDIO
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
WOOFER
CD recorder
DVD
SURR
(REAR)
To audio output
To audio input
PHONO
SUB
WOOFER
AUDIO
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
CD
CD player
DVD
SURR
(REAR)
OUT
(REC)
TAPE
PHONO
MD
IN
To audio output
(PLAY)
CD
OUT
(REC)
OUT
CDR
(REC)
IN
TAPE
(PLAY)
MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
CDR
IN
(PLAY)
Cassette deck or MD recorder
Cassette deck
To audio output
To audio input
SUB
WOOFER
AUDIO
CENTER
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
SURR
(REAR)
If your audio components have a COMPU LINK or TEXT
COMPU LINK jack
• See also page 43 for detailed information about the connection
and the COMPU LINK remote control system.
PHONO
CD
• See also page 44 for detailed information about the connection
and the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system.
OUT
(REC)
TAPE
MD
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
CDR
IN
(PLAY)
To audio input
To audio output
MD recorder
Note:
You can connect either a cassette deck or an MD recorder to the
TAPE/MD jacks. When connecting an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD
jacks, change the source name to “MD,” which will be shown on the
display when it is selected as the source. See page 17 for details.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Video component connections
IMPORTANT:
This receiver is equipped with the following video jacks—composite
video, S-video and component video jacks. You can use any of the
three to connect a video component.
Use the cables with RCA pin plugs (not supplied).
Connect the white plug to the audio left jack, the red plug to the
audio right jack, and the yellow plug to the video jack.
• If your video components have S-video (Y/C-separation) and/or
component video (Y, PB/CB, PR/CR) terminals, connect them using
an S-video cable (not supplied) and/or component video cable (not
supplied). By using these jacks, you can get a better picture
quality in the order—Component video > S-video > Composite
video.
However, the video signals from one type of these input jacks are
output only through the video output jacks of the same type.
Therefore, if a recording video component and a playing video
component are connected to the receiver through the video jacks of
the different type, you cannot record the picture. In addition, if the TV
and a playing video component are connected to the receiver through
the video jacks of the different type, you cannot view the playback
picture on the TV.
VCR(s)
C
D
A
S-VHS/VHS VCR
B
AUDIO
E F
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
OUT
(REC)
VCR1
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
VCR2
IN
(PLAY)
Å To left/right audio output
ı To left/right audio input
Ç To composite video output
Î To S-video output
MONITOR
OUT
A
C
D
‰ To composite video input
Ï To S-video input
S-VHS/VHS VCR
E
B
F
Video camera
VIDEO
The VIDEO input jacks on the front panel are convenient when
connecting and disconnecting the equipment frequently.
• When you do not use the jacks on the front panel, attach the
supplied front terminal cover to protect them from dust.
S-VIDEO
VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
To audio
output
To S-video
output
• When attaching the cover
• When removing the cover
USB AUDIO
VIDEO
VIDEO
U
SB
S-VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
A
U
D
IO
S
To composite
video output
-V
ID
PUSH OPEN
E
O
V
V
ID
ID
E
O
E
O
L
—
A
U
D
IO
—
R
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV and/or DBS tuner
When connecting the TV to the AUDIO jacks
(TV SOUND/DBS), DO NOT connect the TV’s video output
to these video input jacks.
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
DBS
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
(REC)
VCR1
Y
PB/CB
PR/CR
IN
(PLAY)
A
OUT
(REC)
TV
VCR2
IN
(PLAY)
MONITOR
OUT
Connect the TV to the
appropriate MONITOR
OUT jacks to view a
play-backing picture
from other connected
video components.
B
C
D
Å To audio output
ı To composite video input
Ç To S-video input
Î To component video input
VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AUDIO
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
DBS
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
(REC)
VCR1
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
A
VCR2
DBS tuner
IN
(PLAY)
DBS
MONITOR
OUT
B
C
D
Å To audio output
Notes:
ı To S-video output
Ç To component video output
Î To composite video output
• When connecting a DBS tuner to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks,
change the source name to “DBS,” which will be shown on the
display when it is selected as the source. See page 17 for details.
• When connecting a DBS tuner to the component video input jacks,
make the component video input setting correctly. See pages 25
and 49 for details.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD player
• When you connect a DVD player with stereo output jacks:
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
DVD
DBS
DVD
FRONT
TV SOUND
DBS
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
(REC)
VCR1
Y
PB/CB
PR/CR
IN
(PLAY)
OUT
(REC)
A
DVD player
VCR2
IN
(PLAY)
DVD
MONITOR
OUT
B
C
D
Å To front left/right audio output
ı To S-video output
Ç To component video output
Î To composite video output
• When you connect a DVD player with its analog discrete output (5.1-channel reproduction) jacks:
DVD player
B
C
A
G
F
DVD
D
E
VIDEO
VIDEO
SUB
COMPONENVIDEO
AUDIO
CENTER
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
WOOFER
DVD
DBS
DVD
DVD
FRONT
SURR
(REAR)
TV SOUND
DBS
PHONO
OUT
(REC)
MONITOR
OUT
CD
VCR1
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TAPE
MD
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
Å To surround left/right audio output
ı To center audio output
VCR2
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
Ç To subwoofer output
CDR
Î To front left/right audio output
‰ To composite video output
Ï To S-video output
MONITOR
OUT
IN
(PLAY)
Ì To component video output
Note:
When connecting a DVD player to the component video input jacks,
make the component video input setting correctly. See pages 25 and 49
for details.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Digital Connections
• When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have
been set for use with the following components:
– DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player
This receiver is equipped with four DIGITAL IN terminals—one
digital coaxial terminal and three digital optical terminals—and one
DIGITAL OUT terminal.
– DIGITAL 2 (optical): For CD player
– DIGITAL 3 (optical): For digital TV broadcast tuner
– DIGITAL 4 (optical): For CD recorder
IMPORTANT:
• When you want to operate the CD player, CD recorder, or MD
recorder using the COMPU LINK remote control system, connect
the target component also as described in “Analog Connections”
(see page 9).
• When connecting a DVD player, digital TV broadcast tuner or DBS
tuner using the digital terminals, you also need to connect it to the
video jacks on the rear. Without connecting it to the video jacks, you
can view no playback picture.
• When you want to operate a DVD player using the AV COMPU
LINK remote control system (see page 49), connect the DVD
player also as described in “Analog Connections” (see page 12).
• After connecting the components using the DIGITAL IN terminals,
set the following correctly if necessary.
– Set the digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting correctly. For
details, see “6 Setting the Digital Input (DIGITAL IN) Terminals”
on page 25.
– Select the digital input mode correctly. For details, see “Selecting
the Analog or Digital Input Mode” on page 19.
Digital input terminals
Digital output terminal
You can connect any digital equipment as follows.
Digital TV
CD recorder
MD recorder
DBS tuner
Digital VCR
DBS
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
between digital optical terminals
DVD player
CD player
DVD
CD recorder
MD recorder
When the digital recording
equipment such as an MD recorder
and CD recorder has a digital
optical input terminal, connecting it
to the DIGITAL OUT terminal
enables you to perform digital-to-
digital recording.
PCM/DOLBY DIGITAL
/DTS
Digital coaxial cable (not supplied)
between digital coaxial terminals
DIGITAL OUT
Digital optical cable (not supplied)
between digital optical terminals
Note:
The digital signal format output through the DIGITAL OUT terminal is
the same as that of the input signal. This means that when the DTS
Digital Surround signals are input, the DTS Digital Surround signals
are output.
When the component has a digital
coaxial output terminal, connect it to the
DIGITAL 1 (DVD) terminal, using a
digital coaxial cable (not supplied).
DIGITAL IN
When the component has a digital
optical output terminal, connect it to the
DIGITAL 2 (CD), DIGITAL 3 (TV) or
DIGITAL 4 (CDR) terminal, using a
digital optical cable (not supplied).
DIGITAL 1 (DVD)
DIGITAL 2 (CD)
DIGITAL 3 (TV)
Before connecting a digital
optical cable, unplug the
protective plug.
DIGITAL 4 (CDR)
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Check if the drivers are correctly installed.
1. Open the Control Panel on your PC: Select [Start] =
[Settings] = [Control Panel].
USB Connection
This receiver is equipped with a USB terminal on the front panel.
You can connect your PC to this terminal and enjoy sound
reproduced through your PC.
When you connect your PC for the first time, follow the procedure
below.
2. Select [System], then [Device Manager] and click [Sound,
video and game controllers] and [Universal serial bus
controllers].
The following window appears, and you can check whether
the drivers are installed.
• Remember you cannot send any signal or data to your PC from
this receiver.
IMPORTANT:
• Check if your PC equipped with the CD-ROM drive is running on
R
R
R
Windows 98*, Windows Me* or Windows XP* and prepare its
CD-ROM.
• Check your PC’s BIOS setting—whether USB is available, and
whether USB IRQ is set to “AUTO” or to available IRQ number.
How to install the USB drivers
The following procedure is described using the English version of
R
Windows 98. If your PC is running on a different version of
operation system or language, the screens shown on your PC’s
monitor will differ from the ones used in the following procedure.
R
1. Turn on your PC and start running Windows 98,
R
R
Windows Me or Windows XP.
If the PC has been turned on, quit all the applications now running.
Note:
The items shown on the PC’s monitor differ depending on
your PC settings.
2. Turn on the receiver, and press USB AUDIO on the front
panel or USB on the remote control.
The lamp on the USB AUDIO on the front panel button lights
up.
6. Change the PC audio setting.
1. If you have closed Control Panel, open it again: Select [Start]
= [Settings] = [Control Panel].
2. Click [Multimedia], then select “USB Audio Device [1]” for
“Playback” of “Audio,” and close the window.
3. Connect the receiver to the PC using a USB cable (not
supplied).
Your PC automatically recognizes this connection, and shows
the following screen on the monitor.
To play back a CD from CD-ROM drive on PC, click [Multimedia],
[CD Music], then check [Enable digital CD audio for this CD-ROM
device].
USB AUDIO
VIDEO
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
L—AUDIO—R
Now PC is ready for playback through the USB connection.
After installation is completed, you can use your PC as the playback
source. The PC automatically recognizes the receiver whenever a
USB cable is connected between the PC and the receiver while the
receiver is turned on.
PC
USB cable
(not supplied)
• When not using the PC as the playback source, disconnect the
USB cable.
To play back sounds on the PC, refer to the manuals supplied with
the sound reproduction application installed in the PC.
Notes:
• DO NOT turn off the receiver or disconnect the USB cable while
installing the drivers and for several seconds while your PC is
recognizing the receiver.
• Use a full speed USB cable (revision 1.0). Recommended cord
length is 1.5 m.
• If your PC does not recognize the receiver, disconnect the USB
cable and connect it again. If it does not work yet, restart Windows.
• The installed drivers can be recognized only when the USB cable is
connected between the receiver and your PC.
• The sound may not be played back correctly—interrupted or
degraded—due to your PC settings and PC specifications.
• When you do not use the jacks on the front panel, attach the
supplied front terminal cover to protect them from dust.
4. Install the USB drivers following the instructions shown on
the PC’s monitor.
R
R
R
R
* Microsoft , Windows 98, Windows Me and Windows XP are
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Putting Batteries in the Remote Control
Connecting the Power Cord
Before using the remote control, put two supplied batteries first.
When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at
the remote sensor on the receiver.
Before plugging the receiver into an AC outlet, make sure that all
connections have been made.
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet.
1. On the back of the remote control, remove the
battery cover.
Keep the power cord away from the connecting cables and the
antenna. The power cord may cause noise or screen interference. We
recommend that you use a coaxial cable to connect the antenna,
since it is well-shielded against interference.
2. Insert batteries. Make sure to match the
Note:
polarity: (+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
The preset settings such as preset channels and sound adjustment
may be erased in a few days in the following cases:
R6P(SUM-3)/AA(15F)
– When you unplug the power cord.
– When a power failure occurs.
CAUTIONS:
• Do not touch the power cord with wet hands.
• Do not pull on the power cord to unplug the cord. When unplugging
the cord, always grasp the plug so as not to damage the cord.
3. Replace the cover.
If the range or effectiveness of the remote control decreases, replace
the batteries. Use two R6P(SUM-3)/AA(15F) type dry-cell batteries.
Note:
After replacing the batteries, set the manufacturers’ codes again (see
page 54).
CAUTION:
Follow these precautions to avoid leaking or cracking cells:
• Place batteries in the remote control so they match the polarity:
(+) to (+) and (–) to (–).
• Use the correct type of batteries. Batteries that look similar may
differ in voltage.
• Always replace both batteries at the same time.
• Do not expose batteries to heat or flame.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Operations
The following operations are commonly used when you play any sound sources.
Before using the remote control
Note:
How to confirm the remote control operation mode
A small amount of power is consumed in standby mode. To turn the
power off completely, unplug the AC power cord.
The display window on the remote control shows the following
information when you press certain buttons on the remote control, so
that you can confirm which operation you do.
Pressing one of the source selecting buttons,
the source name selected appears on the
Selecting the Source to Play
display.
Press one of the source selecting buttons.
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
Buttons
FM/AM
CD
Indications
TUNER
CD
PHONO
TAPE
DVD
CDR
USB
TV
VCR1
VCR2
VIDEO
The lamp on the front panel button for selected source lights up.
• The selected source name and the previously selected Surround/
DSP mode also appear on the display.
PHONO
TAPE/MD
DVD or DVD MULTI
CDR
Ex.: When you
press CD.
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR 1
VCR 2
VIDEO
TV SOUND/DBS
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR 1
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
CD
CDR
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
SOURCE NAME
FM / AM
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
USB
TV/DBS
VCR1
VCR2
VIDEO
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
SOURCE NAME
Ex.: When you
press USB.
On the front panel
From the remote control
Pressing SOUND before you adjust the sound
effect, “SOUND” appears on the display.
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
Selected source name and current
Surround/DSP mode appear
Pressing TEXT DISPLAY or MENU before
you use on-screen menu or TEXT COMPU
LINK, “MENU” appears on the display.
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
DGTL AUTO
DVD MULTI
PRO LOGIC
TUNED STEREO
L
C
R
ANALOG
DSP 3D–PHONIC MIDNIGHT MODE
HEADPHONE DIGITAL EQ INPUT ATT ONETOUCH OPERATION
AUTO MUTING
SUBWFR LFE
LINEAR PCM
DIGITAL
Pressing CONTROL or CATV/DBS
LS
S
RS
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
SB
CONTROL before you operate an audio or
video equipment connected to the receiver,
the remote control operation mode selected
appears on the display (see pages 51 and 54).
SPEAKERS
1
2
SLEEP VOLUME
Ex.: When you
press CATV/
DBS CONTROL.
DVD MULTI
Select the DVD player for viewing the digital
video disc using the analog discrete output
mode (5.1-channel reproduction).
To enjoy the DVD MULTI playback, see
page 37.
Turning On the Power
On the front panel:
DVD
Select the DVD player.
VCR 1
Select the video component connected to the
VCR 1 jacks.
Select the video component connected to the
VCR 2 jacks.
Select the video component connected to the
VIDEO jacks.
STANDBY
Press STANDBY/ON
.
The STANDBY lamp goes off. The name of
the current source and Surround/DSP mode
appear on the display.
VCR 2
VIDEO
STANDBY/ON
Current source name and Surround/DSP mode appear
TV (SOUND)/DBS Select TV sounds (or the DBS tuner).
PHONO *
CD *
CDR *
Select the turntable.
Select the CD player.
Select the CD recorder.
L
R
ANALOG
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
TAPE/MD *
USB (AUDIO)
Select the cassette deck (or the MD recorder).
Select the personal computer (PC) connected
to the USB terminal.
Current volume level appears
FM/AM *
Select an FM or AM broadcast.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
To turn off the power (into standby mode),
press STANDBY/ON again.
The STANDBY lamp lights up.
STANDBY
STANDBY/ON
From the remote control:
Notes:
AUDIO
Press AUDIO
.
• When connecting an MD recorder (to the TAPE/MD jacks) and a
DBS tuner (to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks), change the source
names shown on the display. For details, see page 17.
• When you press one of the source selecting buttons on the remote
control marked with an asterisk (*), the receiver automatically turns
on.
The STANDBY lamp on the front panel goes off.
The name of the current source and Surround/DSP
mode appear on the display.
To turn off the power (into standby mode), press AUDIO
again. The STANDBY lamp on the front panel lights up.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the remote control:
Changing the source name
When you have connected an MD recorder to the TAPE/MD jacks
or a DBS tuner to the TV SOUND/DBS jacks on the rear panel,
change the source name which will be shown on the display.
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR 1
DVD MULTI
CD
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
VIDEO
CDR
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
On the front panel ONLY:
Note:
When changing the source name from “TAPE” to “MD”:
1. Press TAPE/MD (SOURCE NAME).
TAPE / MD
Once you have selected a video source, pictures of the selected
source are sent to the TV until you select another video source.
• Make sure “TAPE” appears on the display.
SOURCE NAME
2. Press and hold SOURCE NAME
Speaker and signal indicators on the display
(TAPE/MD) until “ASSGN. MD”
appears on the display.
By checking the following indicators, you can easily confirm which
speakers you are activating and which signals are coming into this
receiver from the source.
L
R
ANALOG
Speaker indicators (white)
Signal indicators (red)
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
L
C
R
L
C
R
When changing the source name from “TV” to “DBS”:
1. Press TV SOUND/DBS (SOURCE
SUBWFR LFE
SUBWFR LFE
TV SOUND/DBS
LS
S
RS
S
LS
RS
NAME).
SOURCE NAME
• Make sure “TV” appears on the display.
SB
SB
2. Press and hold SOURCE NAME (TV
SOUND/DBS) until “ASSGN. DBS”
appears on the display.
Surround back speaker
indicators *
The speaker indicators light up—:
• When the corresponding speakers are set to “LARGE” or
“SMALL” (see “1 Setting the Speakers” on page 22) and are also
required for the Surround/DSP mode currently selected.
L
R
ANALOG
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
*
If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker quantity
(see page 22), the center surround back speaker indicator lights up.
If you have selected “2SPK,” the left and right surround back
speaker indicators light up.
To change the source name to “TAPE” or “TV,” repeat the same
procedure above—press and hold SOURCE NAME (TAPE/MD) to
select “TAPE,” or press and hold SOURCE NAME (TV SOUND/
DBS) to select “TV.”
SUBWFR
• When “SUBWOOFER” is set to “YES,”
“1 Setting the Speakers” on page 22.)
lights up. (See
The signal indicators light up to indicate the incoming signals.
Note:
L
: • When digital input is selected: Lights up when the left
channel signal comes in.
Without changing the source name, you can still use the connected
components. However, there may be some inconvenience.
– “TAPE” or “TV” will appear on the display when you select the MD
recorder or DBS tuner.
– You cannot use the digital input (see page 19) for the MD recorder.
– You cannot use the COMPU LINK remote control system (see page
43) to operate the MD recorder.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
: • When digital input is selected: Lights up when the right
channel signal comes in.
• When analog input is selected: Always lights up.
: Lights up when the center channel signal comes in.
R
C
LFE : Lights up when the LFE channel signal comes in.
LS : Lights up when the left surround channel signal comes in.
RS : Lights up when the right surround channel signal comes in.
Selecting different sources for picture and
sound
You can watch picture from a video component while listening to
sound from another component.
S
: When the monaural rear channel signal or 2 channel Dolby
Surround encoded signal comes in.
SB : Lights up when the surround back channel signal comes in.
Note:
Press one of the audio source selecting buttons— PHONO,
CD, CDR, TAPE/MD, USB (AUDIO), FM/AM—while
viewing the picture from a video component such as the
VCR or DVD player, etc.
When “DVD MULTI” is selected as the source, “L,” “C,” “R,” “LFE,” “LS”
and “RS” light up.
The lamp on the front panel button for the selected source lights up.
On the front panel:
DVD MULTI
TV SOUND/DBS
DVD
VCR 1
VCR 2
VIDEO
SOURCE NAME
FM / AM
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
SOURCE NAME
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use neither sets of the speakers, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1
and SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that the SPEAKERS 1 and
SPEAKERS 2 indicators disappear from the display.
The HEADPHONE indicator lights up and “HEADPHONE”
appears on the display.
Adjusting the Volume
On the front panel:
MASTER VOLUME
To increase the volume, turn MASTER
VOLUME clockwise.
To decrease the volume, turn it
counterclockwise.
• Activating the speakers turns on the Surround and DSP modes
previously selected.
Listening Only with Headphones
From the remote control:
You can listen with the headphones without deactivating both pairs
of speakers by connecting a pair of headphones to the PHONES jack
on the front panel. If you want to use a pair of headphones without
outputting sounds from the front speakers, you must turn off both
pairs of the front speakers as mentioned above.
To increase the volume, press VOLUME +.
To decrease the volume, press VOLUME –.
+
VOLUME
−
CAUTION:
HEADPHONE mode
When using the headphones, the following signals are output
regardless of your speaker setting:
— For 2 channel software, the front left and right channel signals
are output directly from the headphones.
— For multi-channel software, the front left and right, center, and
surround channel signals are down-mixed and then output
from the headphones.
Always set the volume to the minimum before starting any sources. If
the volume is set at its high level, the sudden blast of sound energy
can permanently damage your hearing and/or ruin your speakers.
Notes:
• The volume level can be adjusted within the range of “0” (minimum)
to “70” (maximum).
• If you set One Touch Operation to “ON” (see page 26), you do not
have to adjust the volume level each time you change the source. It
is automatically set to the stored level.
• If a DSP mode is activated, you can enjoy the DSP effects.
“3D H.PHONE” appears on the display and the DSP indicator
lights up on the display. (See page 34.)
Note:
Selecting the Front Speakers
In the following cases, the speakers connected to the FRONT
SPEAKERS 2 terminals are deactivated even if both pairs of the front
speakers are activated.
– If you select “DVD MULTI” as the source.
– If you select any of the Surround/DSP modes which activate the
center and/or surround speaker(s).
IMPORTANT:
You can activate two pairs of the front speakers at the same time only
when the SPEAKER LOAD SELECTOR switch on the rear panel is
set to the “HIGH” position and when signals are sent only to front
speakers. Otherwise, activating one pair of the speakers deactivates
the other.
CAUTION:
On the front panel ONLY:
Be sure to turn down the volume:
When you have connected two pairs of the front speakers, you can
select which to use.
• Before connecting or putting on headphones, as its high volume can
damage both the headphones and your hearing.
• Before turning on speakers again, as its high volume may output
from the speakers.
To use the speakers connected to the
FRONT SPEAKERS 1 terminals, press
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 so that the
SPEAKERS ON/OFF
1
SPEAKERS 1 indicator lights up on the
display. Make sure that the SPEAKERS 2
indicator is not lit on the display.
2
To use the speakers connected to the FRONT SPEAKERS 2
terminals, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that SPEAKERS 2
indicator lights up on the display. Make sure that the SPEAKERS 1
indicator is not lit on the display.
To use both sets of the speakers, press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 so that the SPEAKERS 1 and SPEAKERS 2
indicators light up on the display.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DGTL AUTO: Select this for the digital input mode. The
receiver automatically detects the incoming
signals.
Selecting the Analog or Digital Input
Mode
The DGTL AUTO indicator lights up on the
display, and the digital signal format indicators
for the detected signals also light up.
When you have connected digital source components using the
digital terminals (see page 13), you need to change the input mode
for these components to the appropriate digital input mode
correctly—DGTL AUTO, DGTL DTS, or DGTL D.D.
ANALOG:
Select this for the analog input mode.
The ANALOG indicator lights up.
Before you start, remember...
The digital input (DIGITAL IN) terminal setting should be
correctly done for the sources you want to select the digital input
mode for (see “6 Setting the Digital Input (DIGITAL IN)
Terminals” on page 25). Without setting this digital input terminal
correctly, you cannot change the input mode from analog input to
digital input even if you follow the procedure below.
When selecting “DGTL AUTO,” the following indicators
showing detected signals light up on the display.
: Lights up when Linear PCM signals come
in.
LINEAR PCM
LINEAR PCM
: Lights up when the digital signals are not
recognized.
1. Press one of the source selecting buttons—DVD, TV
(SOUND)/DBS, CD, CDR or TAPE/MD—for which you
DIGITAL : Lights up when Dolby Digital or Dolby
Digital EX signals come in.
want to change the input mode.
The lamp on the front panel button for the selected source lights
up.
: Lights up when DTS Surround or DTS-ES
signals come in.
DVD MULTI
DVD
VCR 2
VIDEO
TV SOUND/DBS
VCR 1
When playing a software encoded with the Dolby Digital or DTS
Digital Surround, the following symptoms may occur:
• Sound does not come out at the beginning of playback.
• Noise comes out while chapters or tracks are being searched for or
skipped over.
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR 1
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
CD
CDR
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
SOURCE NAME
FM / AM
PHONO
CD
CDR
TAPE / MD
USB AUDIO
VCR 2
TAPE/MD
SOURCE NAME
1. Press INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL (INPUT ATT) or
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT on the remote control.
• “DGTL AUTO” appears on the display.
On the front panel
Note:
From the remote control
2. Press CONTROL UP 5 or DOWN ∞ on the front panel to
select “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS” while “DGTL AUTO”
still remains on the display.
• Each time you press the button, the input mode changes as
follows:
If “TAPE” has been assigned as the source name to the TAPE/MD
button when using an MD recorder, it does not work in this step.
To change the source name, see “Changing the source name” on
page 17.
DGTL AUTO
L
R
2. Press INPUT ANALOG/DIGITAL (INPUT ATT)—or
ANALOG/DIGITAL INPUT on the remote control—
briefly to change the input mode.
DIGITAL
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
INPUT
ANALOG/DIGITAL
ANALOG/DIGITAL
INPUT
DGTL AUTO
DGTL D.D
(Digital)
(Digital Dolby Digital)
INPUT ATT
DGTL DTS
(Digital)
On the front panel
From the remote control
When selecting “DGTL D.D” or “DGTL DTS,” the following
indicators showing detected signals light up on the display.
• Each time you press the button, the input mode changes as
follows:
DGTL
When selecting “DGTL D.D”
: • Lights up when Dolby Digital signals
: Always lights up.
DGTL AUTO
L
R
DIGITAL
come in.
DIGITAL
• The frame flashes when Dolby Digital
signals are not recognized.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
When selecting “DGTL DTS”
: • Lights up when DTS Digital Surround
DGTL AUTO
ANALOG
signals come in.
(Digital)
• The frame flashes when DTS Digital
Surround signals are not recognized.
Note:
When you turn off the power or select another source, “DGTL D.D”
and “DGTL DTS” settings are canceled and the digital input mode is
automatically reset to “DGTL AUTO.”
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the shut-off time comes:
The receiver turns off automatically.
Muting the Sound
From the remote control ONLY:
To check or change the time remaining until the shut-off time:
Press SLEEP once.
The remaining time until the shut-off time appears in minutes.
• To change the shut-off time, press SLEEP repeatedly.
Press MUTING to mute the sound through
all speakers and headphones connected.
“MUTING” appears on the display and the volume
turns off (the volume level indicator goes off).
MUTING
To cancel the Sleep Timer:
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP 0min” appears on the display.
(The SLEEP indicator goes off.)
L
R
ANALOG
• Turning off the power also cancels the Sleep Timer.
SPEAKERS
1
Recording a source
For analog-to-analog recording
The volume level
indicator goes off.
Ex.: When the source is “DVD.”
You can record any analog source through the receiver to—
• the cassette deck (or MD recorder) connected to the TAPE/MD
jacks,
• the VCRs connected to the VCR 1 and VCR 2 jacks, and
• the CD recorder connected to the CDR jacks
—at the same time.
To restore the sound, press MUTING again.
• Turning MASTER VOLUME on the front panel or pressing
VOLUME +/– on the remote control also restores the sound.
Changing the Display Brightness
You can dim the display.
For digital-to-digital recording
You can record the currently selected digital input source
through the receiver to a digital recording device connected to
the DIGITAL OUT terminal.
From the remote control ONLY:
DIMMER
Press DIMMER.
• Each time you press the button, the display dims
Notes:
• Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog recordings are not
possible.
and brightens alternately.
• The output volume level, Midnight Mode (see page 24), Bass
Boost (see page 31), digital equalization (see page 39),
Surround modes and DSP modes (see pages 32 to 36) cannot
affect the recording.
• The test tone signal (see pages 40 and 41) does not come out
through the DIGITAL OUT terminal.
Using the Sleep Timer
Using the Sleep Timer, you can fall asleep while listening to music.
Basic adjustment auto memory
This receiver memorizes sound settings for each source—
• when you turn off the power,
From the remote control ONLY:
Press SLEEP repeatedly.
The SLEEP indicator lights up on the display, and
SLEEP
• when you change the source, and
• when you assign the source name (see page 19).
the shut-off time changes in 10 minutes intervals:
When you change the source, the memorized settings for the
newly selected source are automatically recalled.
The following can be stored for each source:
• Analog/digital input mode (see page 19)
• Input attenuator mode (see page 30)
L
R
ANALOG
SPEAKERS
1
SLEEP VOLUME
• Analog Direct (see page 30)
• Speaker channel output levels (see pages 40 and 41)
• Digital equalization pattern (see page 39)
• Sound parameters (see page 42)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
(Canceled)
• Surround and DSP mode selection (see pages 35 and 36)
• Bass Boost setting (see page 31)
0
Ex.: When the source is “DVD.”
Notes:
• If the source is FM or AM, you can assign a different setting for
each band.
• If you want to memorize the volume level with the above
settings, set “ONE TOUCH (OPR)” to “ON” (see page 26).
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic Settings
Some of the following settings are required after connecting and positioning your speakers while others will make
operations easier.
• When performing the basic settings, it is recommended to use the remote control so that you can show the
on-screen display on the TV.
• When using the buttons on the front panel, you can perform the same settings. (The following on-screen display
cannot be shown if you use the buttons on the front panel.)
• The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for about 1 minute.
Basic Procedure
Ex. When setting the subwoofer information
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control):
On the front panel:
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
1. Press MENU.
PLAY
MENU
/REW
EXIT
FF/
The MENU screen appears on
the TV.
PAUSE
SET
SETTING
1. Press SETTING repeatedly until
DOWN – TUNING – UP
“SUB WOOFER” appears on the
display.
CONTROL
STOP
On-screen operating
buttons
Each time you press the button, the setting items
change as follows.
• For details about each setting item (1 to 9), see pages 22 to
26.
L
R
ANALOG
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
press 2 or 3.
to “SETTING,” then
SETTING 1 menu showing setting items appears on the TV.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
• The item pointed by
is also shown on the display on the
unit.
FRONT SPK:LARGE (1)
SURR SPK:SMALL (1)
SBACK OUT:2SPK (1)
EX/ES:AUTO (2)
SUB WOOFER:NO (1)
CNTR SPK:SMALL (1)
SBACK SPK:SMALL (1)
SURR CH:SURR (1)
DIST UNIT:meter (3)
CNTR DIST:3.0m (3)
SBACK DIST:3.0m (3)
LFE ATT:0dB (4)
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SUBWOOFER.”
• To go to the next screen, press ∞ continuously.
• To go back to the previous screen, press 5 continuously.
FRONT DIST:3.0m (3)
SURR DIST:3.0m (3)
CROSS OVER:100Hz (4)
MID NIGHT:OFF (5)
2:CD 3:TV 4:CDR (6)
VIDEO DBS:S/C (7)
FL DISP:TEXT (9)
3
1
2
4
5
DGTL COAX 1:DVD (6)
VIDEO DVD:S/C (7)
ONE TOUCH:OFF (8)
(Back to the beginning)
SETTING 1 menu
SETTING 2 menu
6
7
8
9
CONTROL
2. Press CONTROL UP 5 or
DOWN ∞ to select a setting you
DOWN
UP
SETTING 3 menu
want to use.
In this example, the subwoofer information is
set to “YES” to output bass sound through the
subwoofer.
For details about each setting item (1 to 9), see pages 22 to 26.
4. Press 2 or 3 to select
L
R
ANALOG
a setting you want to
use.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
In this example, the
subwoofer information is set
to “YES” to output bass
sound through the
subwoofer.
NOTICE—
• Items shown on the on-screen display and on the front
panel display in this section are initial values when shipped
from the factory.
• Some of the items cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted
according to currently selected settings. (For details, see
the respective explanation.)
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Surround back speakers quantity—S BACK (SBACK)
1 Setting the Speakers
OUT
To obtain the best possible surround sound from the Surround and
DSP modes, you have to register the setting about the speaker
arrangement after all connections are completed.
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
7 Subwoofer setting—SUBWOOFER
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
Select the surround back speakers quantity.
2SPK
1SPK
: Select this to use 2 surround back speakers.
: Select this to use 1 surround back speaker.
Select whether you have connected a subwoofer or not.
Notes:
YES
NO
: Select this when a subwoofer is connected.
: Select this when no subwoofer is used.
• If you have selected “NONE” for the surround back speakers
(see the left), this setting cannot be available.
• If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker
quantity, connect the surround back speaker to the PRE OUT
SURR BACK L (left) jack.
Note:
If you have selected “NO” for the subwoofer, you cannot use
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF on the front panel.
7 Selecting surround speakers to use—SURR CH (OUT)
7 Sizes for front speakers, center speaker, surround
speakers, and surround back speakers–—FRONT
SPK, CENTER (CNTR) SPK, SURR SPK, S BACK
(SBACK) SPK
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
Select the surround speakers to activate when playing back
5.1-multi-channel software.
SURR
: Select this to use only the left and right
surround speakers.
SBACK
: Select this to use only the surround back
speakers.
Select the sizes for each connected speaker.
SURR+SBK : Select this to use both the surround speakers
(S+SBK)
and surround back speakers.
LARGE : Select this when the speaker size is relatively large.
SMALL : Select this when the speaker size is relatively small.
Notes:
NONE : Select this when you have not connected a speaker.
• If you have selected “NONE” for the surround back speakers
(see the left), this setting is skipped.
(Not selectable for the front speakers)
• If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker
quantity, this setting is skipped. The surround channels’ signals
are output through the surround speakers.
• This setting is ignored when performing 6.1-channel
reproduction.
Notes:
• Keep the following comments in mind as reference when
adjusting.
– If the size of the cone speaker unit built in your speaker is
larger than 12 cm (4 3/4 inches), select “LARGE,” and if it is
smaller than 12 cm (4 3/4 inches), select “SMALL.”
• If you have selected “NO” for the subwoofer setting, you can
only select “LARGE” for the front speakers.
• If you have selected “SMALL” for the front speakers, you
cannot select “LARGE” for the center, surround, and surround
back speakers.
• If you have selected “SMALL” for the surround speakers, you
cannot select “LARGE” for the surround back speakers.
• If you have selected “NONE” for the surround speakers, the
surround back speakers are fixed to “NONE.”
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Selecting Channel Numbers to Reproduce
Multi-channel Digital Software—EX/ES
3 Setting the Speaker Distance
The distance from your listening point to the speakers is another
important element to obtain the best possible sound of the Surround
and DSP modes. You need to set the distance from your listening
point to the speakers.
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
By referring to the speaker distance setting, this unit automatically
sets the delay time of the sound through each speaker so that sounds
through all the speakers can reach you at the same time.
7 Measuring unit—DIST UNIT
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
You can select 5.1-channel reproduction or 6.1-channel reproduction
when playing back multi-channel (more than 5.1-channel) digital
software with setting the surround back speakers to “LARGE” or
“SMALL” (see page 22). “AUTO” is initial setting.
AUTO : Select this to reproduce signals originally recorded as
marked on the software such as
• When playing back Dolby Digital EX software (bearing
the mark ), “DOLBY D EX (Dolby Digital EX)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software,
“DOLBY D (Dolby Digital)” activates without using the
surround back speaker(s).
or
.
Select which unit you use.
meter : Select this to set the distance in meters.
feet : Select this to set the distance in feet.
7 Speaker distance—FRONT DIST, CENTER (CNTR)
• When playing back DTS-ES Discrete software (bearing
DIST, SURR DIST, S BACK (SBACK) DIST
the mark
), “ES DSCRETE (DTS-ES Discrete)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back DTS-ES Matrix software (bearing the
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
mark
), “ES MATRIX (DTS-ES Matrix)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel
software, “DTS (DTS Digital Surround)” activates
without using the surround back speaker(s).
ON
: Select this to activate 6.1-channel reproduction using the
surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back Dolby Digital EX software (bearing
the mark
), “DOLBY D EX (Dolby Digital EX)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software,
“DOLBY D EX (Dolby Digital EX)” activates using the
surround back speaker(s). Surround back channels are
reproduced using digital matrix processing.
Set the distance from the listening point within the range of
0.3 m (1 ft) to 9.0 m (30 ft), in 0.3 m (1 ft) intervals.
Notes:
• When playing back DTS-ES Discrete software (bearing
• You cannot set the speaker distance for the speakers you have
selected “NONE” (see page 22).
• This setting is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.
the mark
), “ES DSCRETE (DTS-ES Discrete)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back DTS-ES Matrix software (bearing the
mark
), “ES MATRIX (DTS-ES Matrix)”
activates using the surround back speaker(s).
• When playing back DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel
software, “DTS NEO:6” activates using the surround
back speaker(s). Surround back channels are reproduced
using digital matrix processing.
C
L
R
3.3 m
(11 ft)
3.0 m
(10 ft)
2.7 m
30˚
30˚
90˚
90˚
(9 ft)
OFF : Select this to activate 5.1-channel reproduction without
using the surround back speaker(s).
2.4 m
(8 ft)
2.1 m
(7 ft)
• When playing back Dolby Digital EX software (bearing
LS
RS
the mark
) or DTS-ES software (bearing the mark
), the surround back signals are output from the
surround speakers mixed with the surround signals.
• When playing back Dolby Digital or DTS Digital
Surround 5.1-channel software, conventional “DOLBY D
(Dolby Digital)” or “DTS (DTS Digital Surround)”
activates.
60˚
60˚
LSB
RSB
Note:
If you have selected “NONE” for the surround back speakers (see
page 22), you cannot select this setting. The 6.1-channel and 5.1-
channel software are played back as “OFF” is selected.
EX. In the above case, set the speaker distance as follows:
FRONT DIST
:
:
:
:
3.0 m or 10 ft
3.0 m or 10 ft
2.7 m or 9 ft
2.4 m or 8 ft
CENTER (CNTR) DIST
SURR DIST
S BACK (SBACK) DIST
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Setting the Bass Sounds
5 Setting the Dynamic Range—MID NIGHT
You can adjust subwoofer and bass sounds precisely according to
your preference.
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
7 Crossover frequency—CROSSOVER
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
You can enjoy a powerful sound at night using the Midnight Mode.
Select one of the following:
1
2
: Select this when you want to reduce the dynamic range. The
MIDNIGHT MODE indicator lights up on the display.
When you use a subwoofer, you can select the cutoff frequency
for the small speakers used.
: Select this when you want to apply the compression effect
(useful at midnight). The MIDNIGHT MODE indicator
lights up on the display.
Select one of the crossover frequency levels from “80Hz,”
“100Hz,” “120Hz” and “150Hz” according to the size of the
small speaker connected.
OFF : Select this when you want to enjoy surround with its full
dynamic range (no effect applied). The MIDNIGHT MODE
indicator goes off from the display.
80Hz
: Select this frequency when the cone speaker unit
built in the speaker is about 12 cm (4 3/4 inches).
100Hz : Select this frequency when the cone speaker unit
built in the speaker is about 10 cm (3 15/16 inches).
Notes:
• If Analog Direct is in use, Midnight Mode is temporarily canceled.
• Midnight Mode is not valid for DVD MULTI playback mode even
though the setting is adjustable.
120Hz : Select this frequency when the cone speaker unit
built in the speaker is about 8 cm (3 3/16 inches).
150Hz : Select this frequency when the cone speaker unit
built in the speaker is about 6 cm (2 3/8 inches).
Notes:
.• If you have selected “LARGE” for all activated speakers (see
page 22), this function is fixed to “OFF.”
• Crossover frequency is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback,
All Channel Stereo and 3D HEADPHONE mode.
7 Low frequency effect attenuator—LFE ATT
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
If the bass sound is distorted while playing back software
encoded with Dolby Digital or DTS Surround, set the LFE level
to eliminate distortion.
Select one of the following:
0dB
: Normally select this.
−10dB : Select this when the bass sound is distorted.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When “DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)” is set to “CD”
6 Setting the Digital Input (DIGITAL IN)
Terminals
2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR
2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD**
2: DVD 3: MD** 4: CDR
2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR
(back to the beginning)
“
“
“
“
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
* If you have changed the source name from “TV” to “DBS,”
“DBS” appears (see page 17).
** If you want to connect an MD recorder to the digital input
terminal, change the source name to “MD” from “TAPE” (see
page 17).
When you use the digital input terminals, you have to register which
components you have connected to the digital input terminals.
Note:
When shipped from the factory, the DIGITAL IN terminals have been
set for use with the following components:
– DIGITAL 1 (coaxial): For DVD player
7 Digital coaxial terminal—DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)
Set the component connected to the digital coaxial terminal
– DIGITAL 2 (optical): For CD player
(DIGITAL IN 1)—DVD, MD**, CDR, TV (or DBS*) or CD.
– DIGITAL 3 (optical): For digital TV broadcast tuner
– DIGITAL 4 (optical): For CD recorder
* If you have changed the source name from “TV” to “DBS,”
“DBS” appears (see page 17).
** If you want to connect an MD recorder to the digital input
terminal, change the source name to “MD” from “TAPE” (see
page 17).
7 Setting the Component Video Input
When you use the component video inputs for the DVD player and/
or DBS tuner, you have to register the type of input jacks.
Without setting this correctly, you cannot view the correct input on
the TV.
7 Digital optical terminals—DIGITAL 2, DIGITAL 3 and
DIGITAL 4
Set the components connected to the digital optical terminals
(DIGITAL IN 2 – 4).
• Each time you press 2 or 3 on the remote control or
CONTROL UP 5 or DOWN ∞ on the front panel, the digital
component names change as follows:
7 For the DVD player—VIDEO DVD
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
When “DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)” is set to “DVD”
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS* ) 4: CDR
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD**
2: CD 3: MD** 4: CDR
2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS* ) 4: CDR
(back to the beginning)
“
“
“
“
Select one of the following:
COMPONENT : Select this when connecting the DVD
(COMPNT)
player to the component video input jacks.
When “DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)” is set to “MD”**
S/C
: Select this when connecting the DVD
player to the composite video or S-video
input jacks.
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD
2: CD 3: DVD 4: CDR
2: DVD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: CDR
(back to the beginning)
“
“
“
“
7 For the DBS tuner—VIDEO DBS
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
When “DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)” is set to “CDR”
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD
2: CD 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: MD**
2: CD 3: MD** 4: DVD
2: MD** 3: TV (or DBS*) 4: DVD
(back to the beginning)
“
“
“
“
Select one of the following:
When “DIGITAL 1 (DGTL COAX 1)” is set to “TV” or
“DBS”*
COMPONENT : Select this when connecting the DBS
(COMPNT)
tuner to the component video input jacks.
2: CD 3: DVD 4: CDR “ 2: CD 3: DVD 4: MD**
2: CD 3: MD** 4: CDR “ 2: MD** 3: DVD 4: CDR “
(back to the beginning)
“
S/C
: Select this when connecting the DBS tuner
to the composite video or S-video input
jacks.
Note:
If you have not selected appropriate video input jacks, the AV
COMPU LINK remote control system cannot operate properly.
(See page 49.)
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8 Memorizing the Volume Level for Each Source 9 Showing the Text Information on the Display
—ONE TOUCH OPR (ONE TOUCH)
—FL DISPLAY (DISP)
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
[On-screen display]
[Front panel]
This unit memorizes some settings separately for each source (see
page 20).
In addition, you can store the volume level for each source with the
other memorized settings.
When you have connected an MD recorder or CD player equipped
with TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system (see page 44),
you can show the text information such as disc title or track title on
the display of this receiver.
Select one of the following:
Select one of the following:
NORMAL
(NORM)
: Source name and Surround/DSP mode appear
during play.
ON
: Select this to store the volume level separately for each
source. (The ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator
lights up on the display.)
TEXT
:Text information appears during play.
This receiver memorizes the volume level—
• when you change the source
Note:
• when you change the source name.
Though you have selected “TEXT,” the source name and
Surround/DSP mode will appear while playing a disc that has no text
information.
OFF
: Select this not to store the volume level.
To recall the volume level
With the ONE TOUCH OPERATION indicator lits, the volume
level for the currently selected source is recalled when the source is
selected.
To cancel the One Touch Operation
Set One Touch Operation to “OFF” so that the ONE TOUCH
OPERATION indicator goes off.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Receiving Radio Broadcasts
You can browse through all the stations or use the preset function to go immediately to a particular station.
Tuning into Stations Manually
Using Preset Tuning
On the front panel:
Once a station is assigned to a channel number, the station can be
quickly tuned in. You can preset up to 30 FM and 15 AM stations.
FM/AM
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
(FM or AM).
To store the preset stations
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button
lights up. The last received station of the
selected band is tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
On the front panel ONLY:
TUNED STEREO
L
R
ANALOG
1. Tune in the station you want to preset (see
“Tuning into Stations Manually” on the left).
• If you want to store the FM reception mode for this station,
select the FM reception mode you want. See “Selecting the
FM Reception Mode” on page 28.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
2. Press FM/AM TUNING 5 or ∞
FM/AM TUNING
until you find the frequency you
TUNED STEREO
L
R
ANALOG
want.
• Pressing FM/AM TUNING 5 increases
the frequency.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
• Pressing FM/AM TUNING ∞ decreases
the frequency.
MEMORY
2. Press MEMORY.
From the remote control:
FM / AM
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
TUNED STEREO
L
R
ANALOG
(FM or AM).
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button
lights up. The last received station of the
selected band is tuned in.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
The channel number position starts flashing on the display for
about 10 seconds.
FM/AM PRESET
3. Press FM/AM PRESET 5 or ∞ to
2. Press TUNING UP 3 or
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
DOWN – TUNING – UP
select a channel number while the
channel number position is
flashing.
TUNING DOWN 2 until
you find the frequency you
want.
TUNED STEREO
• Pressing TUNING UP 3 increases the
L
R
ANALOG
frequency.
• Pressing TUNING DOWN 2 decreases the
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
frequency.
Notes:
MEMORY
4. Press MEMORY again while the
selected channel number is
• When a station of sufficient signal strength is tuned in, the TUNED
indicator lights up on the display.
• When an FM stereo program is received, the STEREO indicator
also lights up.
flashing on the display.
The selected channel number stops flashing.
The station is assigned to the selected channel number.
• When you hold and then release the button in step 2, the frequency
keeps changing until a station is tuned in.
TUNED STEREO
L
R
ANALOG
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 until you store all the stations
you want.
To erase a stored preset station
Storing a new station on a used number erases the previously stored
one.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To tune in a preset station
On the front panel:
Selecting the FM Reception Mode
When an FM stereo broadcast is hard to receive or noisy, you can
change the FM reception mode while receiving an FM broadcast.
• You can store the FM reception mode for each preset station (see
page 27).
FM/AM
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
(FM or AM).
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button lights
up. The last received station of the selected band is
tuned in.
While listening to an FM station, press FM MODE.
• Each time you press the button, the FM reception mode alternates
between “FM AUTOMUTING” and “FM MODE MONO.”
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
FM/AM PRESET
2. Press FM/AM PRESET 5 or ∞
FM MODE
SBACK•L
∗
until you find the channel you
0
want.
FM MODE
• Pressing FM/AM PRESET 5 increases the
number.
On the front panel
From the remote control
• Pressing FM/AM PRESET ∞ decreases the
number.
TUNED STEREO
L
R
ANALOG
From the remote control:
AUTO MUTING
VOLUME
FM / AM
1. Press FM/AM to select the band
SPEAKERS
1
(FM or AM).
The FM/AM lamp on the front panel button lights
up. The last received station of the selected band is
tuned in.
• Each time you press the button, the band
alternates between FM and AM.
TUNED
L
R
ANALOG
BASS
2. Press the 10 keys to select a
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
TEST
2
3
preset channel number.
• For channel number 5, press 5.
• For channel number 15, press +10
then 5.
• For channel number 20, press +10
then 10.
SPEAKERS
1
VOLUME
MENU
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
ENTER
4
5
6
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
7/P
8
9
FM AUTOMUTING: Normally select this.
When a program is broadcasted in
DIGITALEQ SBACK•L
SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
10
RETURN
0
+10
+
100
FM MODE
stereo, you will hear stereo sound;
when in monaural, you will hear
monaural sounds. This mode is also
useful to suppress static noise between
stations. The AUTO MUTING indicator
lights up on the display. (Initial setting)
• For channel number 30, press +10, +10,
then 10.
Note:
When you use the 10 keys on the remote control, be sure that they
are activated for the tuner, not for the CD and others. (See page 51.)
FM MODE MONO: Select this to improve the reception (but
stereo effect will be lost).
In this mode, you will hear noise while
tuning into the stations. The AUTO
MUTING indicator goes off from the
display. (The STEREO indicator also
goes off.)
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Storing the preset stations
Operating the Tuner Using the On-Screen
Display
1. Press MENU.
The MENU screen appears on the TV.
You can also operate the tuner using the on-screen display.
• The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for
about 1 minute.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
then press 2 or 3.
to “TUNER CONTROL,”
The TUNER CONTROL menu appears.
7 Operating the tuner
3. Tune into a station you want to store on the
TUNER CONTROL menu, referring to
“Operating the tuner”.
1. Press MENU.
PLAY
MENU
/REW
EXIT
FF/
The MENU screen appears on
the TV.
4. Press 5 or ∞ to move
then press 2 or 3.
to “PRESET MEMORY,”
PAUSE
SET
moves to “PRESET CH” and the channel number starts
flashing.
DOWN – TUNING – UP
CONTROL
STOP
On-screen operating
buttons
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
then press 2 or 3.
to “TUNER CONTROL,”
The TUNER CONTROL menu appears.
5. Press 2 or 3 to select a channel number you
want.
6. Press SET to store the setting.
The selected channel number stops flashing.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 until you store all the stations
you want.
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to an item you want to
8. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
set or adjust.
On the TUNER CONTROL menu, you can do the following:
BAND
: Select the band.
PRESET CH
FREQUENCY
FM MODE
: Select a preset channel station.
: Tune in a station manually.
: Select the FM reception mode.*
: See “Storing the preset stations” on
the right.
PRESET MEMORY
Note:
* “FM MODE” is not displayed when an AM station is selected.
4. Press 2 or 3 to select an item you want to use.
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Sound
You can select the following sound settings to your preference according to your listening conditions or sources.
• Items shown in this section are the initial values when shipped from the factory.
• The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for about 1 minute.
Attenuating the Input Signal
Turning Analog Direct On and Off
When the input level of the analog source is too high, the sounds
will be distorted. If this happens, you need to attenuate the input
signal level to prevent the sound distortion.
You can enjoy the sound closer to the original source by overriding
the sound adjustments such as speaker output level adjustments (see
page 40), Equalization pattern (see page 39), Surround and DSP
modes (see pages 32 to 36), Bass Boost (see page 31) and Midnight
Mode (see page 24). You can only adjust the volume level while
Analog Direct is in use.
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
On the front panel:
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
INPUT
Press and hold INPUT ATT (INPUT
ANALOG/DIGITAL
ANALOG/DIGITAL) so that the
INPUT ATT indicator lights up on the
display.
• Each time you press and hold the button, the
input attenuator mode turns on (“ATT ON”) or
off (“NORMAL”).
Press ANALOG DIRECT to turn on Analog Direct.
The ANALOG DIRECT lamp on the front panel button lights up.
• Each time you press the button, Analog Direct turns on and off.
– When Analog Direct turns on, “A. DIRECT” appears on the
display.
INPUT ATT
ANALOG DIRECT
ANALOG
DIRECT
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
1. Press MENU.
PLAY
MENU
/REW
EXIT
FF/
The MENU screen appears on
the TV.
On the front panel
From the remote control
PAUSE
SET
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
1. Press MENU.
DOWN – TUNING – UP
The MENU screen appears on the TV.
CONTROL
STOP
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
then 2 or 3.
to “SOUND CONTROL,”
On-screen operating
buttons
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
then 2 or 3.
to “SOUND CONTROL,”
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
DIRECT.”
to “ANALOG
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “INPUT ATT.”
4. Press 2 or 3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”
When Analog Direct is turned on, the ANALOG DIRECT lamp
on the front panel button lights up.
4. Press 2 or 3 to select “ATT ON” or
– When Analog Direct turns on, “A. DIRECT” appears on the
display.
“NORMAL.”
When “ATT ON” is selected, the INPUT ATT indicator lights up
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
on the display.
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
Notes:
• When digital input mode is in use, Analog Direct is not available.
• Turning on Surround or DSP mode cancels Analog Direct and
previously selected sound adjustments are recalled.
• If Analog Direct is in use, Midnight Mode is temporarily canceled
even though adjustable.
Notes:
• This function is available when analog input terminals are in use.
• This function is not valid for the DVD MULTI playback mode.
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes:
Reinforcing the Bass
• This function does not affect the sounds outputting from the
surround speakers.
• When Analog Direct is in use (see page 30), the Bass Boost
function is canceled temporarily.
You can boost the bass level.
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
On the front panel:
BASS BOOST
Press BASS BOOST to turn on Bass
Activating the Subwoofer Sound
Boost function.
The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel button
lights up.
• Each time you press the button, Bass Boost
activates (“BOOST ON”) and deactivates
(“BOOST OFF”) alternately.
You can cancel the subwoofer sound even though you have
connected a subwoofer and have set “SUBWOOFER” to “YES”
(see page 22). This is useful when enjoying surround sound at night.
On the front panel:
SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
From the remote control:
Press SUBWOOFER OUT ON/OFF
to cancel the subwoofer sound
output.
Each time you press the button, the subwoofer sound output is
deactivated (“SUBWFR OFF”) and activated (“SUBWFR ON”)
alternately.
SOUND
1. Press SOUND.
The 10 keys are activated for sound
adjustments.
BASS
BOOST
2. Press BASS BOOST to turn on Bass
Boost function.
The BASS BOOST lamp on the front panel
button lights up.
1
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
1. Press MENU.
• Each time you press the button, Bass Boost activates
The MENU screen appears on the TV.
(“BOOST ON”) and deactivates (“BOOST OFF”) alternately.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SOUND
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
CONTROL,” then 2 or 3.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
1. Press MENU.
PLAY
MENU
/REW
EXIT
FF/
The MENU screen appears on
the TV.
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SUBWOOFER.”
PAUSE
SET
DOWN – TUNING – UP
CONTROL
STOP
On-screen operating
buttons
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
then 2 or 3.
to “SOUND CONTROL,”
4. Press 2 or 3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “BASS BOOST.”
Notes:
• If you have selected “NO” for the subwoofer (see page 22), you
cannot use this function.
• When you have selected “SMALL” for the front speakers, you
cannot select “OFF” for the subwoofer even if it is set to “YES” (see
page 22).
4. Press 2 or 3 to select “ON” or “OFF.”
When Bass Boost is turned on, the BASS BOOST lamp on the
front panel button lights up.
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Surround Modes and DSP Modes
This unit activates a variety of Surround modes and DSP (Digital Signal Processor) modes. To use Surround and DSP
modes properly, speakers required for creating each Surround and DSP modes should be activated.
I Surround Modes
Reproducing Theater Ambience
Introducing the Surround Modes
In a movie theater, many speakers are located on the walls to
reproduce impressive multi-surround sounds, reaching you from all
directions.
With these many speakers, sound localization and sound movement
can be expressed.
I Dolby Surround
Dolby Digital EX*
Dolby Digital EX is newly introduced surround encoding format as
an extension of multi-channel Dolby Digital, designed to add an
extra surround channel to Dolby Digital 5.1-channel (see below). By
using a matrix encoding/decoding method, additional “surround
back” channel signal is encoded (and decoded) in both the left and
right surround channel signals.
Surround modes built in this receiver can create almost the same
surround sounds as you can feel in a real movie theater.
Movie theater
Compared to the conventional Dolby Digital 5.1-channel, this newly
added surround back channel can reproduce more detailed
movements behind you while viewing the video software. In
addition, surround sound localization will become more stable, so
that you can enjoy a realistic surround field in your listening room.
Best used to reproduce multi-channel movie sound tracks of the
software encoded with Dolby Digital EX (
).
• To enjoy the software encoded with Dolby Digital EX, connect the
source component using the digital terminals on the rear of this
receiver. (See page 13.)
Dolby Digital*
Used to reproduce multi-channel sound tracks of the software
encoded with Dolby Digital (
).
D
I
G
I
T
A
L
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel encoding method (so-called discrete
5.1-channel digital audio format) records and digitally compresses
the left front channel, right front channel, center channel, left
surround channel, right surround channel, and LFE channel signals
(total 6 channels, but LFE channel is counted as 0.1 channel,
therefore, called 5.1-channel).
Since each channel is completely independent from the other
channel signals to avoid interference, you can obtain a much better
sound quality with better stereo and surround effects.
At home
Center speaker
Subwoofer
• To enjoy the software encoded with Dolby Digital, connect the
source component using the digital terminals on the rear of this
receiver. (See page 13.)
* Dolby Digital software can be roughly grouped into two categories
—multi-channel (up to 5.1-channel) and 2-channel software. To
enjoy surround sounds while playing Dolby Digital 2-channel
software, you can use Dolby Pro Logic II.
Left front speaker(s)
Right front speaker(s)
Dolby Pro Logic II*
Dolby Pro Logic II has a newly developed multi-channel playback
format to convert all 2-channel software into 5-channel (plus Subwoofer).
Matrix-based conversion method for Dolby Pro Logic II makes no
limitation for the cutoff frequency of the surround treble and enables
stereo surround sound unavailable with conventional Dolby Pro Logic.
Right surround speaker
Left surround speaker
Dolby Pro Logic II can reproduce spacious sound from original
sound without adding any new sounds and tonal colorations.
Dolby Pro Logic II has two modes—Movie mode and Music mode:
Pro Logic II Movie (PL II MOVIE)—suitable for the reproduction
DOLBY SURROUND
of Dolby Surround encoded sources bearing the mark
You can enjoy a sound field very close to the one created with
discrete 5.1-channel sounds.
.
Pro Logic II Music (PL II MUSIC)—suitable for the reproduction
of any 2-channel stereo sources. You can enjoy wide and deep sound
by using this mode. For this mode, you can make precise
adjustments to match the sound to your taste.
Surround back speaker(s)
• When Dolby Pro Logic II is activated, the
PRO LOGIC II
indicator lights up on the display.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolby Surround (Dolby Pro Logic)*
DTS Digital Surround**
Used to reproduce sound tracks of the software encoded with Dolby
DOLBY SURROUND
Surround (
).
Used to reproduce multi-channel sound tracks of the software
encoded with DTS Digital Surround (
).
Dolby Surround encoding format records the left front channel,
right front channel, center channel, and surround channel signals
(total 4 channels) into 2 channels.
DTS Digital Surround is a discrete 5.1-channel digital audio
format available on CD, LD, and DVD software.
The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built in this receiver decodes these
2-channel signals into original 4-channel signals—matrix-based
multi-channel reproduction, and allows you to enjoy a realistic
surround sound in your listening room.
Compared to Dolby Digital, DTS Digital Surround format has a
lower audio compression ratio which enables it to add breadth and
depth to the sounds reproduced. As such, DTS Digital Surround
features natural, solid and clear sound.
• When Dolby Pro Logic is activated, the
lights up on the display.
PRO LOGIC indicator
• To enjoy the software encoded with DTS Digital Surround,
connect the source component using the digital terminals on the
rear of this receiver. (See page 13.)
When using Surround mode, the sounds come out of all the
connected and activated speakers.
• If only the front speakers are connected, JVC’s original
3D-PHONIC processing (which has been developed to create the
surround effect only through the front speakers) is used.
The 3D-PHONIC indicator lights up on the display.
I DTS Digital Surround
DTS-ES Extended Surround (DTS-ES)**
DTS-ES Extended Surround is another new digital surround
encoding format, developed by Digital Theater Systems, Inc., that
adds the third surround channel—surround back channel. (See
“Dolby Digital EX.”)
DTS ES has two types—DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1:
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1—compatible with DTS-ES Extended
Surround (DTS-ES), which has discrete 6.1-channel. You can play
DVD MULTI Playback Mode
This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for
reproducing the analog discrete 5.1-channel output mode of the
DVD player.
You can adjust the sound reproduced by DVD MULTI playback
mode while playing back video software such as a DVD using
the analog discrete 5.1-channel output mode.
• For the connection and the details of the DVD MULTI
playback mode, see page 37.
back the software encoded with DTS ES (
).
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1—is designed to add an extra surround channel
to DTS Digital Surround 5.1-channel. By using a matrix encoding/
decoding method, additional “surround back” channel signal is
encoded (and decoded) in both the left and right surround channel
signals. You can playback the software encoded with DTS-ES
(
).
• To enjoy the software encoded with DTS-ES, connect the source
component using the digital terminal on the rear of this receiver.
(See page 13.)
Note:
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, you cannot
select any Surround and DSP modes.
Neo:6**
Neo:6 is a newly developed conversion method to create
6-channel (plus subwoofer) from all 2-channel software. Neo:6 has
two modes—Neo:6 Cinema and Neo:6 Music:
*
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby,” “Pro
Logic,” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Neo:6 Cinema—suitable for reproduction of matrix-based 2-channel
software.
** “DTS,” “DTS-ES Extended Surround” and “Neo:6” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Neo:6 Music—suitable for reproduction of all 2-channel stereo
music software.
Reproduced software and channels for each Surround mode
Surround
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Surround
mode
Playback
software
Dolby Digital 2-channel
Dolby Surround
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel
2-channel stereo software 2-channel stereo software
Reproduced
channels
6.1-channel
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1
DTS-ES
5.1-channel
5-channel + (subwoofer)
4-channel + (subwoofer)
Surround
mode
DTS-ES Matrix 6.1
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
DTS Digital Surround
Playback
software
DTS-ES
(with Matrix 6.1-channel
signals)
(with Discrete -channel
6.1
2-channel stereo software
6-channel + (subwoofer)
DTS Digital Surround
5.1-channel
signals)
Reproduced
channels
6.1-channel
6.1-channel
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I DSP Modes
DAP (Digital Acoustic Processor) modes
All Channel Stereo mode (ALL STEREO)
This mode can reproduce a larger stereo sound field using all the
connected (and activated) speakers.
The sound heard in a concert hall, club, etc. consists of direct sound
and indirect sound—early reflections and reflections from behind.
Direct sounds reach the listener directly without any reflection. On
the other hand, indirect sounds are delayed by the distances of the
ceiling and walls (see the diagram below). These indirect sounds are
the most important elements of the acoustic surround effects.
The DAP mode can reproduce a realistic sound field by adding these
indirect sounds.
All Channel Stereo can be used when the front and surround
speakers are connected to this receiver without respect to the
center and/or surround back speakers connection.
Reflections from
behind
Early reflections
Direct sounds
Sound reproduced from normal stereo
You can use the following DAP modes in order to reproduce a more
acoustic sound field in your listening room.
HALL 1:
HALL 2:
Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a large concert
hall (where the seating capacity is about 1,000).
Gives clear vocal and the feeling of a small concert
hall (where the seating capacity is about 300).
LIVE CLUB: Gives the feeling of a live music club with a low
ceiling.
DANCE CLUB: Gives a throbbing bass beat.
PAVILION:
Gives the spacious feeling of a pavilion with a
high ceiling.
Sound reproduced from All Channel Stereo mode
JVC Theater Surround
In order to reproduce a more realistic sound field in your listening
room, you can use JVC Theater Surround.
THEATER 1: Reproduces the sound field of a large theater
(where the seating capacity is about 1,000).
3D HEADPHONE Mode
THEATER 2: Reproduces the sound field of a small theater
(where the seating capacity is about 300).
This receiver creates acoustic environment through the
headphones as though using 5 speakers by signal processing
algorithms—3D HEADPHONE mode. The processor combines
all channels except LFE channel into two encoded channels.
By turning off both the SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and
When using DAP mode or JVC Theater Surround, the sounds
come out of all the connected and activated speakers.
• If only the front speakers are connected or the front and
center speakers are connected, JVC’s original 3D-PHONIC
processing (which has been developed to create the surround
effect only through the front speakers) is used.
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 then pressing DSP, 3D HEADPHONE
mode is activated without respect to the type of software played
back. You can enjoy more natural sound as though you are
listening to directly through the conventional stereo headphones.
The DSP and HEADPHONE indicators also light up.
The 3D-PHONIC indicator lights up on the display.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Surround and DSP Modes According to the Speaker Layouts
Available Surround and DSP modes will vary depending on how many speakers are used with this receiver.
Make sure that you have set the speaker setting correctly (see page 22).
• To turn on and select Surround and DSP modes, see page 36.
Speaker layouts
6 or 7 speakers
Available Surround modes
Available DSP modes
THEATER 1
THEATER 2
HALL 1
Dolby Digital EX software : DOLBY D EX*
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software
: DOLBY D*
Front
speaker
Front
speaker
TV
Center speaker
HALL 2
: DOLBY D EX**
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
ALL STEREO
DTS-ES software
: ES DSCRETE*
ES MATRIX*
Surround
speaker
Surround
speaker
DTS 5.1-channel software : DTS*
: DTS NEO:6**
2-channel software
: PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC
PRO LOGIC, NEO:6CINMA
NEO:6MUSIC
Surround
back
speaker
Surround
back
speaker
Surround
back
speaker*
* When selecting “1SPK” for the surround
back speaker setting (see page 22).
5 speakers
THEATER 1
THEATER 2
HALL 1
Dolby Digital EX software : DOLBY D
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software
: DOLBY D
Front
speaker
Front
TV
speaker
Center speaker
HALL 2
DTS-ES software
DTS 5.1-channel software : DTS
2-channel software : PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC
: DTS
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
ALL STEREO
PRO LOGIC, NEO:6CINMA
NEO:6MUSIC
Surround
speaker
Surround
speaker
4 speakers
THEATER 1
THEATER 2
HALL 1
Dolby Digital EX software : DOLBY D
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software
: DOLBY D
Front
speaker
Front
speaker
TV
HALL 2
DTS-ES software
DTS 5.1-channel software : DTS
2-channel software : PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC
: DTS
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
ALL STEREO
PRO LOGIC, NEO:6CINMA
NEO:6MUSIC
Surround
speaker
Surround
speaker
3 speakers
Front
speaker
Dolby Digital EX software : DOLBY D
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software
: DOLBY D
THEATER 1
THEATER 2
HALL 1
Front
speaker
TV
Center speaker
DTS-ES software
DTS 5.1-channel software : DTS
2-channel software : PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC
: DTS
HALL 2
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
PRO LOGIC, NEO:6CINMA
NEO:6MUSIC
2 speakers
Dolby Digital EX software : DOLBY D
Dolby Digital 5.1-channel software
: DOLBY D
THEATER 1
THEATER 2
HALL 1
Front
speaker
Front
speaker
TV
DTS-ES software
DTS 5.1-channel software : DTS
2-channel software : PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC
: DTS
HALL 2
LIVE CLUB
DANCE CLUB
PAVILION
3D H.PHONE
TV
Notes:
* You can select these modes by setting “EX/ES” to “AUTO” (initial setting) when the surround back speakers are set to “LARGE” or “SMALL” (see
pages 22 and 23).
**You can select these modes by setting “EX/ES” to “ON” when the surround back speakers are set to “LARGE” or “SMALL” (see pages 22 and 23).
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If Surround mode is canceled while playing back multi-channel
digital software, all channel signals are mixed and output through
the front speakers (and subwoofer if you have connected a
subwoofer and set its setting correctly—“YES”).
Activating the Surround Modes
Available Surround modes will vary depending on how many
speakers are used with this receiver.
You can also adjust digital equalization patterns,
speaker output levels and some sound parameters.
See “Adjusting Sound” on pages 38 to 42 for details.
Make sure that you have set the speaker setting correctly (see
page 22).
1. Set the analog or digital input mode for the
source you like to use and start playing.
When playing back multi-channel digital software, select the
digital input mode (see page 19).
Activating the DSP Modes
1. Select and play any sound source.
2. Press SURROUND to activate Surround mode.
• The SURROUND lamp on the front panel button lights up.
SURROUND
2. Press DSP to activate DSP mode.
The last selected DSP mode is activated.
SURROUND
• The DSP lamp on the front panel button lights up.
DSP
DSP
On the front panel
From the remote control
• When playing back multi-channel digital software, an
appropriate Surround mode will be selected according to your
setting. See “2 Selecting Channel Numbers to Reproduce
Multi-channel Digital Software” on page 23 for details.
When selecting “AUTO” (initial setting) for “EX/ES” setting,
Surround modes shown on page 35 are activated.
On the front panel
From the remote control
• Each time you press the button, DSP mode changes as follow:
THEATER 1 = THEATER 2 = HALL 1 = HALL 2 =
LIVE CLUB = DANCE CLUB = PAVILION =
ALL STEREO* =(Back to the beginning)
• If you are playing back any other software—analog, Linear
PCM, Dolby Digital 2-channel—the last selected Surround
mode is activated. Each time you press the button, Surround
mode changes as follow:
* “ALL STEREO” can be selected when the surround speakers
are set to “LARGE” or “SMALL” (see page 22).
• More than 3 speakers*
To cancel the DSP mode
PL II MOVIE = PL II MUSIC = PRO LOGIC =
NEO:6CINMA = NEO:6MUSIC = (Back to the beginning)
Press SURROUND/DSP OFF on the front panel or SURR/DSP OFF
on the remote control so that “SURR OFF” appears on the display.
DSP and Surround modes are deactivated. The DSP lamp on the
front panel button goes off.
• 2 speakers*
PL II MOVIE
“
PL II MUSIC
* See also speaker layouts on page 35.
You can also adjust digital equalization patterns,
speaker output levels and some sound parameters.
See “Adjusting Sound” on pages 38 to 42 for details.
To cancel the Surround mode
Press SURROUND/DSP OFF on the front panel or SURR/DSP
OFF on the remote control so that “SURR OFF” appears on the
display. Surround and DSP modes are deactivated. The
Note:
SURROUND lamp on the front panel button goes off.
If Analog Direct is turned on when using analog input mode (see
pages 19 and 30), currently selected Surround and/or DSP mode is
canceled temporarily.
SURROUND/DSP
OFF
SURR/DSP
OFF
On the front panel
From the remote control
Available Surround and DSP modes for each input signal
Mode
Surround
off (stereo)
DAP
modes
JVC Theater All Channel
3D
headphone
Available Surround mode
Headphone
Signals
Surround
Stereo
Dolby Digital
⅜
⅜
Dolby D EX
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
EX (6.1-channel)
(5.1-channel)
(2-channel)
Dolby D, Dolby D EX*
PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC, PRO LOGIC,
NEO:6CINMA, NEO:6MUSIC
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
DTS Digital Surround
(DTS-) ES DSCRETE, DTS
ES Discrete (6.1-channel)
ES Matrix (6.1-channel)
(5.1-channel)
⅜
⅜
(DTS-) ES MATRIX, DTS
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
DTS, DTS NEO:6*
Linear PCM
PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC, PRO LOGIC,
NEO:6CINMA, NEO:6MUSIC
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
⅜
Analog
PL II MOVIE, PL II MUSIC, PRO LOGIC,
NEO:6CINMA, NEO:6MUSIC
* You can select these modes by setting “EX/ES” to “ON” when the surround back speakers are set to “LARGE” or “SMALL” (see pages 22 and 23).
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the DVD MULTI Playback Mode
This receiver provides the DVD MULTI playback mode for reproducing the analog discrete output mode of the DVD
player. Before playing back a DVD, refer also to the manual supplied with the DVD player.
When using DVD MULTI playback mode, connect the DVD player with its analog discrete output jacks (Å – ‰).
DVD player
B
C
A
G
F
DVD
D
E
VIDEO
VIDEO
SUB
COMPONENVIDEO
AUDIO
CENTER
S-VIDEO
RIGHT
LEFT
RIGHT
LEFT
WOOFER
DVD
DBS
DVD
DVD
FRONT
SURR
(REAR)
TV SOUND
DBS
PHONO
OUT
(REC)
MONITOR
OUT
CD
VCR1
Y
P
B/CB
PR/CR
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
TAPE
MD
Å To surround left/right channel audio output
ı To center channel audio output
Ç To subwoofer output
Î To front left/right channel audio output
‰ To composite video output
Ï To S-video output
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
VCR2
OUT
IN
(REC)
(PLAY)
CDR
MONITOR
OUT
IN
(PLAY)
Ì To component video output
2. Select the analog discrete output mode on the
DVD player, and start playing a DVD.
Activating the DVD MULTI Playback Mode
• Refer also to the manual supplied with the DVD player.
1. Press DVD MULTI so that “DVD MULTI”
appears on the display.
The DVD MULTI lamp on the front panel button and the DVD
MULTI indicator light up.
You can also adjust digital equalization patterns and
speaker output levels. See “Adjusting Sound” on
pages 38 to 41 for details.
DVD MULTI
DVD MULTI
• Test tone does not output through the speakers to adjust the
speakers output levels when selecting DVD MULTI.
On the front panel
Note:
From the remote control
Notes:
When you select “DVD MULTI” as the source to play, the
Surround and DSP modes are canceled, and the SURROUND
and DSP buttons do not work.
• Midnight Mode is not available for DVD MULTI playback mode (see
page 24).
• When using a pair of headphones, the sounds of front left and right
channels are output from the headphones.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting Sound
You can adjust sound parameters to your preference after completing basic setting.
• When performing the sound adjustments, it is recommended to use the TV screen so that you can show the
on-screen display on the TV.
• When using the buttons on the front panel or remote control without using the on-screen display, you can perform
the same adjustments. (The on-screen display cannot be shown.)
• The on-screen display will disappear if no operation is done for about 1 minute.
Basic Procedure
You can also adjust the sound without showing menus on the TV. For details, see each explanation that follows.
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
1. Press MENU.
The MENU screen appears on the TV.
PLAY
MENU
/REW
EXIT
FF/
PAUSE
SET
DOWN – TUNING – UP
CONTROL
STOP
On-screen operating buttons
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SOUND CONTROL,” then press 2 or 3.
The SOUND CONTROL menu appears.
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to select “DIGITAL EQ (Equalization),” “LEVEL ADJUST” or “EFFECT
ADJUST,” then press 2 or 3.
4. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to an item you want to set.
DIGITAL EQ (Equalization) menu
(see page 39)
SOUND CONTROL menu
LEVEL ADJUST menu (see page 40)
EFFECT ADJUST menu (see page 42)
5. Press 2 or 3 to adjust a sound parameter.
6. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the menu disappears from the TV.
• If Analog Direct is in use, you cannot make any sound adjustments.
• Above items shown on the on-screen display are initial values when shipped from the factory.
• Some of the items cannot be shown or cannot be adjusted. (For details, see the respective explanation in this section.)
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROL
DOWN UP
2. Press CONTROL UP 5 or
Adjusting the Equalization Patterns
—DIGITAL EQ
DOWN ∞ repeatedly to adjust the
frequency level.
The DIGITAL EQ indicator lights up on the
display.
• The frequency level changes from –8 dB to
+8 dB in 2 dB steps.
You can adjust the equalization patterns to your preference.
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
1. Show DIGITAL EQ (Equalization) menu (see
page 38).
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust the other
frequency levels.
To flat the equalization pattern,
set all the frequency levels to “0dB” in step 2. The DIGITAL EQ
indicator goes off from the display.
From the remote control:
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to the frequency you
want to adjust.
3. Press 2 or 3 to adjust the frequency level you
SOUND
1. Press SOUND.
want.
“SOUND” appears on the remote control display
window.
The DIGITAL EQ indicator lights up on the display.
• The frequency level changes from –8 dB to +8 dB in 2 dB
steps.
• The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other
frequency levels.
DIGITALEQ
∗
2. Press DIGITAL EQ (Equalization)
repeatedly to select the frequency you
want to adjust.
10
RETURN
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
“EQ” appears on the remote control display window.
• Each time you press the button, the frequency with its current
level changes as follows:
To flat the equalization pattern,
set all the frequency levels to “0dB” in step 3. The DIGITAL EQ
indicator goes off from the display.
EQ 1kHz
EQ 63Hz
EQ250Hz
and its level
and its level
and its level
EQ16kHz
EQ 4kHz
and its level
and its level
On the front panel:
• “0dB” is the initial setting for each frequency.
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
3. Press LEVEL + or − repeatedly
+
to adjust the frequency level.
DIGITAL
1. Press DIGITAL EQ (Equalization)
CH/ LEVEL
The DIGITAL EQ indicator lights up on
the display.
• The frequency level changes from
–8 dB to +8 dB in 2 dB steps.
∗
EQ
U
repeatedly to select the frequency you
want to adjust.
• Each time you press the button, the frequency
with its current level changes as follows:
−
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other
frequency levels.
EQ 1kHz
EQ 63Hz
EQ250Hz
and its level
and its level
and its level
EQ16kHz
EQ 4kHz
To flat the equalization pattern,
and its level
and its level
set all the frequency levels to “0dB” in step 3. The DIGITAL EQ
indicator goes off from the display.
• “0dB” is the initial setting for each frequency.
Notes:
• When Analog Direct is in use, the digital equalization patterns
cannot be adjusted.
• The digital equalization patterns affect the front speaker sounds
only.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
Adjusting the Speaker Output Levels
—LEVEL ADJUST
Adjustment is also possible without outputting the test tone. In this
case, you can skip steps 2, 3 and 7 below.
You can adjust the speaker output levels. The test tone can be also
output from each speaker except subwoofer to check the output level
balance when using the Surround mode.
1. Show LEVEL ADJUST menu (see page 38).
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
• When using the buttons on the front panel to adjust output level
for the Surround mode, no test tone is available.
7 Adjustable speakers
You can adjust the following speakers’ output levels within the
range of –10 dB to +10 dB (“0 dB” is the initial setting):
SUBWFR
:
Select this to adjust the subwoofer
output level.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “TEST TONE.”
FRONT L (FRNT L) :
Select this to adjust the left front
speaker output level.
3. Press 2 or 3 to select “ON” to check if you can
hear the sounds through all the speakers at equal
level.
A test tone comes out of the speakers (only if the speakers are
activated) in the following order:
CENTER
:
Select this to adjust the center
speaker output level.
FRONT R (FRNT R):
Select this to adjust the right front
speaker output level.
FRONT L (Left front speaker) = CENTER (Center speaker) =
SURR R
:
Select this to adjust the right
surround speaker output level.
FRONT R (Right front speaker)
SURR R (Right surround speaker)
=
=
S BACK R (SBK R) *:
S BACK R (Right surround back speaker)* =
S BACK L (Left surround back speaker) or
Select this to adjust the right
surround back speaker output level.
S BACK (Surround back speaker)*
=
S BACK L (SBK L)
:
:
Select this to adjust the left surround
back speaker output level.
SURR L (Left surround speaker) = (Back to the beginning)
or S BACK*
* If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker (see
page 22), “S BACK” appears instead of “S BACK L” and
“S BACK R.” No test tone outputs from the right surround back
speaker.
SURR L
Select this to adjust the left surround
speaker output level.
Notes:
4. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to a speaker you want
* If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker (see
page 22), “S BACK” appears instead of “S BACK (SBK) L” and
“S BACK (SBK) R.” No test tone outputs from the right surround
back speaker.
to adjust.
5. Press 2 or 3 to adjust the speaker output level
(–10 dB to +10 dB).
• If you have selected “NO” or “NONE” for a speaker (see page
22), the output level for the corresponding speaker cannot be
adjustable.
• The center and left and right surround speakers’ output levels
are adjustable for DVD MULTI playback mode, even though
“NONE” is selected for the speaker settings.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 to adjust the other speakers
output levels.
• Speaker output levels except that of the subwoofer are not
adjustable when Analog Direct is in use.
7. After the adjustment is finished, press 5 or ∞ to
move
to “TEST TONE,” then select “OFF.”
8. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
Notes:
• If you have selected “NO” or “NONE” for a speaker (see page 22),
test tone does not come out of the corresponding speaker.
• Subwoofer output level cannot be adjusted when outputting test
tone. When you adjust the subwoofer output level, select “OFF” for
“TEST TONE.”
• Test tone does not output through the speakers when selecting
DVD MULTI.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the remote control:
SOUND
5. Press SOUND again then repeat steps 3
and 4 to adjust the other speakers
output levels.
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 2 again.
TEST
6. Press TEST again to stop the test
tone.
Adjustment is also possible without outputting the test tone. In this
case, you can skip steps 2 and 6 below.
4
MEN
1. Press SOUND.
SOUND
Notes:
“SOUND” appears on the remote control display
window.
• If you have selected “NO” or “NONE” for a speaker (see page 22),
test tone does not come out of the corresponding speaker.
• Subwoofer output level cannot be adjusted when
• The 10 keys are activated for sound adjustments.
SUBWFR
∗
outputting test tone. When you adjust the
6
TEST
2. Press TEST to check if you can
hear the sounds through all the
speakers at equal level.
subwoofer output level, press SOUND, SUBWFR
then LEVEL + or – to adjust the speaker output
level (–10 dB to +10 dB). (“S-WFR” appears on the
remote control display window.)
4
MEN
A test tone comes out of the speakers (only if the speakers are
activated) in the following order:
It is recommended to make adjustments while listening to the
sound of the source played back.
• Test tone does not output through the speakers when selecting
DVD MULTI.
FRNT L (Left front speaker) = CENTER (Center speaker) =
FRNT R (Right front speaker) =
SURR R (Right surround speaker)
=
SBK R (Right surround back speaker)* =
SBK L (Left surround back speaker) or
S BACK (surround back speaker)*
On the front panel:
=
You can also use the buttons on the front panel to adjust the speaker
output levels. However, no test tone is available when using the
buttons on the front panel. So make adjustments while listening to
the sound of the source played back.
SURR L (Left surround speaker) = (Back to the beginning)
* If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker (see
page 22), “S BACK” appears instead of “SBK L” and “SBK R.”
No test tone outputs from the right surround back speaker.
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
3. Select a speaker you want to adjust.
The selected speaker name appears on
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
MENU
∗
ENTER
∗
the remote’s display for a while.
• To select the left front speaker, press
FRONT•L. “FRL” appears on the
remote control display window.
• To select the center speaker, press
CENTER. “CTR” appears on the
remote control display window.
• To select the right front speaker,
press FRONT•R. “FRR” appears on
the remote control display window.
2
3
L
LEVEL
1. Press LEVEL ADJUST repeatedly to
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
ADJUST
5
6
select a speaker you want to adjust.
• Each time you press the button, the items change
as follows.
SURR•L
∗
SURR•R
8
9
Q
SBACK•L
SBACK•R
∗
∗
0
+10
100
SUBWFR (Subwoofer) = FRNT L (Left front speaker) =
CENTER (Center speaker) = FRNT R (Right front speaker) =
SURR R (Right surround speaker)
SBK R (Right surround back speaker)* =
+
FM MODE
=
SBK L (Left surround back speaker) or
S BACK (surround back speaker)*
SURR L (Left surround speaker) = (Back to the beginning)
• To select the right surround speaker, press SURR•R.
“SURRR” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the right surround back speaker, press SBACK•R.
“SBKR” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the left surround back speaker, press SBACK•L.
“SBKL” appears on the remote control display window.
• To select the left surround speaker, press SURR•L. “SURRL”
appears on the remote control display window.
=
* If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker (see
page 22), “S BACK” appears instead of “SBK L” and “SBK R.”
CONTROL
2. Press CONTROL UP 5 or
DOWN
UP
DOWN ∞ to adjust the speaker
output level (–10 dB to +10 dB).
Note:
If you have selected “1SPK” for the surround back speaker (see
page 22), press SBACK•L to adjust the surround back speaker
output level.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust the
other speakers output levels.
4. Press LEVEL + or – to adjust the
speaker output level (–10 dB to
+10 dB).
+
CH/ LEVEL
∗
−
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the on-screen display (through the remote control]:
Adjusting the Sound Parameters for the
Surround and DSP Modes—EFFECT ADJUST
1. Show EFFECT ADJUST menu (see page 38).
You can adjust the Surround and DSP sound parameters to your
preference.
• Once you have made adjustment, it is memorized for each source.
7 Adjustable parameters
You can adjust the following parameters:
Parameters that are not adjustable for the currently
selected Surround and DSP modes are skipped.
For Surround, DAP, JVC Theater Surround and All Channel
Stereo modes (when the center speaker is connected)
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to a parameter you
CENTER TONE : Adjust the center tone. As the number
(CTR TONE)
increases, the dialogue becomes clearer so
that the human voices change from soft to
sharp. (Normally select “3.”Adjustable range:
1 to 5)
want to adjust.
3. Press 2 or 3 to adjust the parameter.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust the other
parameters.
For DAP modes and JVC Theater Surround
EFFECT LEVEL :
(EFFECT)
Adjust the DAP effect level. As the
number increases, the DAP effect
becomes stronger. (Normally select “3.”
Adjustable range: 1 to 5)
5. When you finish, press EXIT repeatedly until the
menu disappears from the TV.
Adjust the virtual room size. As the
number increases, the interval between
reflections increases so that you will feel
as if you were in a larger room. (Normally
select “3.” Adjustable range: 1 to 5)
ROOM SIZE
(ROOMSIZE)
:
:
On the front panel:
Before you start, remember...
There is a time limit in doing the following steps. If the setting is
canceled before you finish, start from step 1 again.
Adjust the liveness effect. As the number
increases, the attenuation level of
reflections over time decreases so that
acoustics change from “Dead” to “Live.”
(Normally select “3.”Adjustable range: 1 to 5)
LIVENESS
1. Press EFFECT repeatedly to select a
EFFECT T
parameter you want to adjust.
• Each time you press the button, the items change
as follows:
EFFECT = ROOMSIZE = LIVENESS =
CTR (center) TONE = PNRAMA (Panorama) =
C (center) WIDTH = DIMENSION =
(Back to the beginning)
Note:
You can only adjust the Effect Level when using a DAP mode with
the 3D-PHONIC indicator lights up.
Parameters that are not adjustable for the currently selected
Surround and DSP modes are skipped.
For Pro Logic II Music only
Select “ON” to add “wraparound” sound
effect with side-wall image. (Initial
setting: “OFF”)
PANORAMA
(PNRAMA)
control
:
CONTROL
2. Press CONTROL UP 5 or
DOWN
UP
DOWN ∞ to adjust the sound
parameter.
Adjust the center channel localization
between the center speaker and the left/
right speakers. As the number increases, the
center channel sound moves toward the left
and right speakers. (Normally select “3.”
Adjustable range: OFF and 1 to 7)
CENTER WIDTH :
(CWIDTH)
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to adjust the other
parameters.
Adjust sound localization position. As the
number increases, the sound localization
moves towards forward from backward.
(Normally select “4.”Adjustable range: 1 to 7)
DIMENSION
:
Note:
Parameters that are not adjustable for the currently selected Surround
and DSP modes are skipped.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
COMPU LINK Remote Control System
The COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC’s audio components through the remote sensor on
the receiver.
To use this remote control system, you need to connect JVC’s audio
components through the COMPU LINK (SYNCHRO)-4 jacks (see
below) in addition to the connections using cables with RCA pin
plugs (see pages 8 and 9).
• Make sure that the AC power cords of these components are
unplugged before connection. Plug the AC power cords only after
all connections are complete.
Automatic Source Selection
When you press the play (3) button on a connected component or
on its own remote control, the receiver automatically turns on and
changes the source to the component. On the other hand, if you
select a new source on the receiver or on the remote control, the
selected component begins playing immediately.
In both cases, the previously selected source continues playing
without sound for a few seconds.
CD player
Automatic Power On/Off (Standby): only possible with
the COMPU LINK-3 and COMPU LINK-4
CD recorder
The connected components turn on and off (standby) along with the
receiver.
When you turn on the receiver, one of the connected components
will turn on automatically, depending on which component has been
previously selected.
Cassette deck
or
MD recorder
When you turn off the receiver, the connected components will turn
off (standby).
Synchronized Recording
Synchronized recording means the cassette deck (or MD recorder)
starts recording as soon as a CD begins playing.
COMPU LINK – 4
(SYNCHRO)
To use synchronized recording, follow these steps:
1. Put a tape in the cassette deck (or an MD in the
MD recorder), and a disc in the CD player.
Turntable
2. Press the record (¶) button and the pause (8)
button on the cassette deck (or MD recorder) at
the same time.
This puts the cassette deck (or MD recorder) into recording
pause.
If you do not press the record (¶) button and pause (8) button at
the same time, the synchronized recording feature will not
operate.
Notes:
• There are four versions of COMPU LINK remote control system.
This receiver is equipped with the fourth version—COMPU LINK-4.
This version is added systematic operations with the CD recorder to
the previous version—COMPU LINK-3.
• If your audio component has two COMPU LINK jacks, you can use
either one. If it has only one COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it
is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the
turntable or CD player in the diagram above.)
• To operate a cassette deck or MD recorder using the COMPU LINK
remote control system, set the source name correctly. (See page
17.)
3. Press the play (3) button on the CD player.
The source changes on the receiver, and as soon as play starts,
the cassette deck (or MD recorder) starts recording. When the
play ends, the cassette deck (or MD recorder) enters recording
pause, and stops about 4 seconds later.
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your audio components.
Notes:
• During synchronized recording, the selected source cannot be
changed.
• If the power of any component is shut off during synchronized
recording, the COMPU LINK remote control system may not
operate properly. In this case, you must start again from the
beginning.
This remote control system allows you to use four functions listed
below.
Remote Control through the Remote Sensor on the
Receiver
You can control the connected audio components through the remote
sensor on the receiver using this remote control. Aim the remote
control directly at the remote sensor on the receiver. For details, see
pages 51 and 52.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TEXT COMPU LINK Remote Control System
The TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system has been developed to deal with the disc information recorded in the
CD Text* and MDs. Using these information in the discs, you can operate a CD player or MD recorder equipped with
the TEXT COMPU LINK remote control system through the receiver.
Functions:
Connections:
This remote control system allows you to use the functions listed
below.
To use this remote control system, you need to connect a CD player
and/or MD recorder you want to operate, following the procedures
below.
Showing the Disc Information on the TV screen
1. If you have already plugged your CD player, MD
recorder, and this receiver into the AC outlets,
unplug their AC power cords first.
Disc information such as its performer and disc title (and track titles
only when a CD Text is selected) is shown on the TV screen.
Searching for a Disc: Only for the CD Player
This remote control system can allow you to search for discs by the
performer, disc title, and music genre.
With this disc search, you can easily find the disc you want to play.
2. Connect your CD player, MD recorder, and this
receiver as follows, through the COMPU LINK
jacks and TEXT COMPU LINK jacks.
Entering the Disc Information
1) COMPU LINK jacks: Use the cables with the monaural
If your CD player or MD recorder has the disc memory function,
you can input the following information about the normal audio CDs
or MDs on the TV screen.
mini-plugs (not supplied with this receiver).
• For CDs: Performer, disc title, and music genre
• For MDs: Disc title and song titles
CD player
*What is a CD Text?
MD recorder
In a CD Text, some information about the disc (its disc title, performer,
composer, arranger, etc.) is recorded.
COMPU LINK – 4
(SYNCHRO)
Notes:
• If your audio component has two COMPU LINK jacks, you can use
either one. If it has only one COMPU LINK jack, connect it so that it
is the last item in the series of components. (For example, the CD
player in the diagram in the left column.)
2) TEXT COMPU LINK jacks: Use the cables with the
stereo mini-plugs (not supplied with this receiver).
• If your audio component has two TEXT COMPU LINK jacks, you
can use either one. If it has only one TEXT COMPU LINK jack,
connect it so that it is the last item in the series of components. (For
example, the CD player in the diagram in the left column.)
• “TEXT COMPULINK SOURCE NOT CONNECTED” appears on the
display in the following cases:
CD player
– When the connections explained in the left column are not
correctly done.
MD recorder
– When you try to use the TEXT COMPU LINK function a few
seconds after you turn on the connected equipment.
This is not a malfunction of the units.
TEXT
COMPU LINK
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your CD player or MD
recorder.
3. Connect your CD player, MD recorder and this
receiver, using the cables with RCA pin plugs (see
page 9).
IMPORTANT:
If you turn on the receiver before turning on the other components
after connecting the components, the TEXT COMPU LINK remote
control system does not work correctly.
4. Plug the AC power cords of these components
into the AC outlets.
If this happens:
1. Turn off all the components including this receiver.
2. Turn on the connected components.
3. Turn on this receiver.
5. Turn on the connected components first, then
turn on this receiver.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Source name: CD or MD
2 Select or , then press SET to change the disc.
3 Track numbers and track titles.
Operations:
To use this remote control system, you need to connect the TV to the
MONITOR OUT jack on the rear panel (see page 11), and set the
TV’s input mode to the proper position to which the receiver is
connected. Make sure you have connected a CD player or
MD recorder equipped with the TEXT COMPU LINK
remote control system. If not, you cannot use the
following functions.
• When you move
to a track number, you can
change the track information by pressing 2 or 3.
Each time you press the button, track information
alternates between its track title and its performer.
(You can also start playing the track by pressing SET.)
4 Select this (move
in front), then press SET to go to
the DISC SEARCH screen (see page 46).
5 Select this (move
in front), then press SET to go to
the TITLE INPUT screen (see page 47).
6 This appears only when a CD Text is selected.
7 Disc information such as the disc title, performer, and
music genre.
On-Screen Operating buttons (on the remote control)
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
When this is selected (
in front), you can change the
When you press TEXT DISPLAY,
“MENU” appears on the remote
display window.
disc information by pressing 2 or 3. Each time you
press the button, disc information (see “Note on 7”)
changes.
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
DVD
TV/DBS
VCR1
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
8 Select
or
, then press SET to change the track.
CDR
9 Usable buttons and their functions for the current
selection.
VCR2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND
DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF
INPUT
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
Indication here will be changed according to what is
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
2
3
MENU
SOUND
currently selected (
on 9.”
in front) on the screen. See “Note
TEST
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
4
5
6
ENTER
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
7/P
8
9
MUTING DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
+10
10
0
TEXT
DISPLAY
+
100
RETURN FM MODE
PLAY
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
EXIT
MENU
Note on 7:
+
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
TV/VIDEO
The following information will appear on the display:
• For CD Texts—Disc title, Performer, Genre, Song writer, Composer,
Arranger, Message
Only recorded information will be shown. If there is no data,
“NO DATA” will appear.
−
−
−
EXIT
TEXT
DISPLAY
/REW
FF/
PLAY
PAUSE
SET
MENU
REC
PAUSE
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
DOWN – TUNING
–
UP
SLEEP
DOWN – TUNING – UP
CONTROL
STOP
• For MDs—Disc title
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
If there is no data, “NO DATA” will appear.
STOP
Note on 9:
For example, the SET button will be used to start play (PLAY), to go to
the next screen (ENTER), and to determine the selection (ENTER).
To exit from the Disc information screen
Press EXIT.
Showing the Disc Information on the TV
Screen
Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” or “MD” is
selected as the source.
Notes:
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
• The on-screen display will disappear in the following cases:
– if no operation is done for about 10 minutes.
– if you do any operation other than explained in this section.
• To control an MD recorder using the TEXT COMPU LINK remote
control system, you have to change the source name shown on the
display from “TAPE” to “MD.” (See page 17.)
• Some special characters and marks cannot be displayed correctly.
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Search for a disc by its disc title:
Searching for a Disc (Only for the CD player)
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
Search for a disc by its performer:
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SEARCH,” then
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SEARCH,” then
press SET.
The DISC SEARCH screen
appears.
press SET.
The DISC SEARCH screen
appears .
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “DISC TITLE,”
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “PERFORMER”,
then press SET.
The DISC TITLE SEARCH
screen appears.
then press SET.
The PERFORMER SEARCH
screen appears.
4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the
4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the
first character of the disc title you want to search
for, then press SET.
To correct the incorrect entry, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
first character of the performer you want to
search for, then press SET.
To correct the incorrect entry, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of the correct character, then press SET.
in front of the correct character, then press SET.
Note:
Note:
Symbols such as @, # or $ are not be available for search.
Symbols such as @, # or $ are not be available for search.
5. Press SET again.
Disc search starts, then the
SEARCH RESULT screen
showing the disc titles
appears.
5. Press SET again.
Disc search starts, then the
SEARCH RESULT screen
showing the performers
appears.
6. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the
following:
6. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the
following:
• Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5 or
• Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5 or
∞ to move
to a searched-for disc, then press 2 or 3. Each
∞ to move
to a searched-for disc, then press 2 or 3. Each
time you press 2 or 3, the disc information alternates
between its performer and its disc title.
time you press 2 or 3, the disc information alternates
between its performer and its disc title.
• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information
• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information
screen (see page 45): Press 5 or ∞ to move
to a
screen (see page 45): Press 5 or ∞ to move
to a
searched-for disc, then press SET.
searched-for disc, then press SET.
• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are
listed as a result of the search): Press 5 or ∞ until they
appear.
• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are
listed as a result of the search): Press 5 or ∞ until they
appear.
• Going back to the DISC TITLE SEARCH screen: Press
EXIT.
• Going back to the PERFORMER SEARCH screen: Press
EXIT.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Search for a disc by its genre:
Entering the Disc Information
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
For the CD Player with the disc memory function:
You can use the disc memory function through this receiver.
The disc information (its performer, disc title, and music genre) of
normal audio CDs will be stored into the memory built in the CD
player.
For the disc memory function, refer to the manual supplied with
your CD player.
• The performer, disc title, and music genre information are usually
recorded in a CD Text. However, if a CD Text has no genre
information recorded on the disc itself, you can input its music
genre by yourself.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “SEARCH,” then
press SET.
The DISC SEARCH screen
appears.
Note:
3. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “GENRE”, then
You can enter the TITLE INPUT screen for a CD Text and input its
titles. However, you cannot store the titles you have input for a CD
Text.
press SET.
The GENRE SEARCH screen
appears.
Example: Entering the following information for Disc 1
Performer: “MICHAEL”
Disc title: “MY FAVORITE”
4. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to the genre you
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “CD” is selected as
the source.
want to search for, then
press SET.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “TITLE INPUT,”
To show the unseen genres,
press 5 or ∞ until they
appear.
then press SET.
The TITLE INPUT/
PERFORMER screen appears.
Disc search starts, then the
SEARCH RESULT screen
showing the disc titles appears.
3. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
in front of a
5. On the SEARCH RESULT screen, you can do the
following:
character you want, then press SET to enter the
character.
• Changing the indication of the disc information: Press 5
• If the current CD is a CD Text, go to step 5 without entering
or ∞ to move
to a searched-for disc, then press 2 or 3.
the performer.
Each time you press 2 or 3, the disc information alternates
between its performer and its disc title.
To use the lower case letters, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to
To use the upper case letters again, press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
move to , then press SET.
, then press SET.
• Starting a disc play and going to the Disc Information
screen (see page 45): Press 5 or ∞ to move
to a
searched-for disc, then press SET.
• Showing unseen disc information (if more than 5 discs are
listed as a result of the search): Press 5 or ∞ until they
appear.
• Going back to the GENRE SEARCH screen: Press EXIT.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the MD recorder:
4. Repeat step 3 until you
finish putting a
You can write the disc information (disc title and song titles) onto
the disc. You can only write the song title for the song currently
selected.
• If you have the CD-MD combination deck, you can also enter the
disc information (its performer, disc title, and its music genre) of
normal audio CDs into the memory built in the CD-MD
combination deck. (To do this, follow the procedure of “For the
CD Player with the disc memory function” on page 47.)
• If you change the disc or song title with more than 32 characters,
the characters following 32nd will be erased from the title.
performer name (up to
32 characters).
To insert a space, press 5 / ∞
/ 2 / 3 to move
to
,
then press SET.
To correct an incorrect character:
1) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to + or =, then press
SET until the incorrect character is selected.
2) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to erase the character.
3) Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to
, then press SET
1. Press TEXT DISPLAY while “MD” is selected as
the source.
in front of the correct
character, then press SET to enter the correct character.
The Disc Information screen appears on the TV.
5. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
2. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to “TITLE INPUT,”
move
to “DISC 1:
MICHAEL (in this
example),” then press
SET.
then press SET.
The DISC TITLE INPUT
screen appears.
The TITLE INPUT/DISC
TITLE screen appears.
6. Enter the disc title,
referring to steps 3 and
3. Enter the title,
referring to steps 3 and
4 of “For the CD Player
with the disc memory
function.”
• You can enter up to 32
characters for the disc title.
4.
• If the current CD is a CD
Text, go to the next step
without entering the disc
title.
7. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
4. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to
move
to “DISC 1:
move
to the disc title
MY FAVORITE (in this
example),” then press
SET.
The TITLE INPUT/DISC 1
GENRE screen appears.
you have just entered,
then press SET.
The disc title is stored into the
memory and the SONG
TITLE INPUT screen for the
currently selected song
8. Press 5 or ∞ to move
to the genre you want,
appears.
• You can enter a song title for the song currently selected.
then press SET.
The Disc Information screen appears again.
5. Enter the song title, referring to steps 3 and 4 of
“For the CD Player with the disc memory
function.”
To show the unseen genres, press 5 or ∞ until they appear.
• You can enter up to 32 characters for the song title.
6. Press 5 / ∞ / 2 / 3 to move
to the song title
you have just entered, then press SET.
The song title is stored into the memory and the Disc
Information screen appears again.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AV COMPU LINK Remote Control System
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to operate JVC’s video components (TV, VCR, and DVD player)
through the receiver.
This receiver is equipped with the AV COMPU LINK-III, which adds a function to operate JVC’s video components through the video
components terminals. To use this remote control system, you need to connect the video components you want to operate, following the
diagrams below and the procedure on the next page.
CONNECTIONS 1: AV COMPU LINK Connection
VCR 1
(VCR connected to
VCR 1 jacks)
DVD player
TV
AV
VHS
COMPU LINK-ΙΙΙ
DVD
CAUTION:
AV
COMPU LINK
You can only connect to the TV
with the AV COMPU LINK EX or
AV COMPU LINK-III jack. DO
NOT connect to the TV with AV
COMPU LINK RECEIVER/AMP
jack.
AV
AV
COMPU LINK
COMPU LINK EX
AV
COMPU LINK-ΙΙΙ
IMPORTANT:
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system cannot control the
DBS tuner connected to the TV SOUND/DBS and DBS component
video jacks, and video components connected to the VIDEO and
VCR 2 jacks on the receiver.
Notes:
• When connecting the receiver and a TV with the AV COMPU LINK EX terminal by using a component video cable, you cannot use automatic
selection of TV’s input mode (see page 50).
• When connecting only the VCR 1 or DVD player to this receiver, connect it directly to the receiver using cables with the monaural mini-plugs.
CONNECTIONS 2: Video Cable Connection
This receiver is equipped with three types of the video terminals—S-video, composite video, and component video, and the signals coming
into this receiver through one type of video jacks can output only through the jack of the same type. So you need to connect the VCR and/or
DVD player to the TV using one of the following three ways:
• When using the AV COMPULINK remote control system, set the component video input for the DVD player and the DBS tuner
correctly (see “7 Setting the Component Video Input” on page 25); otherwise, the correct input for this receiver will not be selected on
the TV.
CASE 1
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver through the S-video jacks, connect this receiver
to the TV’s Video Input 1 jack using S-video cables.
Source
Equipment
RX-8020VBK
TV
S-video cable
S-video cable
To Video Input 1
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver through the composite video jacks, connect this
receiver to the TV’s Video Input 2 jack (composite video input) using composite video cables.
CASE 2
Source
Equipment
RX-8020VBK
TV
Composite
video cable
Composite
video cable
To Video Input 2
(Composite)
CASE 3
When connecting the source equipment to the receiver through the component video jacks, connect this
receiver to the TV’s Video Input 2 jack (component video input) using component video cables.
Source
Equipment
RX-8020VBK
TV
Component
video cable
Component
video cable
To Video Input 2
(Component)
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One-Touch DVD Play
1. If you have already plugged your VCR 1 (VCR
connected to the VCR 1 jacks), DVD player, TV
and this receiver into the AC outlets, unplug their
AC power cords first.
Simply by starting playback on the DVD player, you can enjoy the
DVD playback without setting other switches manually.
• When the DVD player is connected through the analog input jacks
on this receiver (and analog input is selected), the receiver
automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD” or
“DVD MULTI.”
• When the DVD player is connected through the digital input
terminal on this receiver (and digital input is selected), the
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to “DVD.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
2. Connect your VCR 1, DVD player, TV and this
receiver, using the cables with the monaural mini-
plugs (not supplied).
• See “CONNECTIONS 1” on the previous page.
3. Connect the audio input/output jacks on VCR 1,
DVD player, TV and this receiver using the cables
with RCA pin plugs.
Automatic Selection of TV’s Input Mode
• See pages 10 to 12.
• When you select “TV” as the source to play on the receiver, the
TV automatically changes the input mode to the TV tuner so that
you can watch TV.
• When you select “DVD,” “DVD MULTI,” “VCR 1,” “VCR 2,”
“VIDEO” or “DBS” as the source to play on the receiver, the TV
automatically changes the input mode to the appropriate position
(either Video Input 1 or Video Input 2) so that you can view the
playback picture.
4. Connect the video input/output jacks on VCR 1,
DVD player, TV and this receiver, using the
cables with RCA pin plugs, S-video plug or
component video plugs.
• See “CONNECTIONS 2” on the previous page.
5. Plug the AC power cords of the components and
the receiver into the AC outlets.
Notes:
• When you select “TV” as the source on the receiver, you cannot
see the menu on the TV screen since the AV COMPU LINK remote
control system automatically changes the TV’s input mode to the
TV tuner.
If you do not mind stopping listening to the TV sounds, you can
then show the on-screen displays after changing the TV’s input
mode to the appropriate position (either Video Input 1 or Video
Input 2).
6. When turning on the TV for the first time after
the AV COMPU LINK connection, turn the TV
volume to the minimum using the TV volume
control on the TV.
• This function does not work when you connect this receiver and the
TV with the AV COMPU LINK using the TV’s AV COMPU LINK EX
terminal. In this case, reconnect the TV referring to case 1 or case 2
on page 49.
7. Turn on the connected components first, then
turn on this receiver.
• When turning on the VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1
jacks), use the remote control supplied with this receiver
(press VCR1
).
Automatic Power On/Off
The TV, VCR 1 (the VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), and DVD
player turn on and off along with the receiver.
When you turn on the receiver;
• If the previously selected source is “VCR 1,” the TV and VCR 1
will turn on automatically.
The AV COMPU LINK remote control system allows you to use the
five basic functions listed below.
Remote Control of the TV, DVD player, and VCR Using
This Remote Control
• If the previously selected source is “DVD” or “DVD MULTI,” the
TV and DVD player will turn on automatically.
• If the previously selected source is “VIDEO,” “VCR 2,” “TV” or
“DBS,” only the TV will turn on automatically.
See page 53 for details.
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on each
target component.
When you turn off the receiver, the TV, VCR 1 and the DVD player
will turn off.
One-Touch Video Play
Note:
Simply by inserting a video cassette without its safety tab into the
VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks), you can enjoy the
video playback without setting other switches manually. The
receiver automatically turns on and changes the source to “VCR 1.”
The TV automatically turns on and changes the input mode to the
appropriate position so that you can view the playback picture.
When you insert a video cassette with its safety tab, press the play
(3) button on the VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks) or on
the remote control. So, you can get the same result.
If you turn off the receiver while recording on the VCR 1, the VCR 1
will not turn off, but continue recording.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating JVC’s Audio/Video Components
You can operate JVC’s audio and video components with this receiver’s remote control, since control signals for JVC’s
components are preset in the remote control.
Tuner
Operating Audio Components
You can always perform the following operations:
IMPORTANT:
FM/AM
:Alternate between FM and AM.
To operate JVC’s audio components using this remote control:
• You need to connect JVC’s audio components through the COMPU
LINK (SYNCHRO) jacks (see page 43) in addition to the
connections using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 8 and 9).
• Aim the remote control directly at the remote sensor on the
receiver.
• If you use the buttons on the front panel or the menu function to
choose a source, the remote control will not operate that source.
To operate a source with the remote control, the source must be
selected using source selecting buttons on the remote control.
• To operate a cassette deck or MD recorder using the COMPU LINK
remote control system, set the source name correctly. (See page 17.)
• Refer also to the manuals supplied with your components.
After pressing FM/AM, you can perform the following operations:
1 – 10, +10
:Select a preset channel number directly.
For channel number 5, press 5.
For channel number 15, press +10, then 5.
For channel number 20, press +10, then 10.
:Tune into stations.
TUNING UP/DOWN
FM MODE
:Change the FM reception mode.
Sound control section (Amplifier)
You can always perform the following operations:
SURROUND
DSP
:Turn on and select Surround modes
:Turn on and select DSP modes.
SURR/DSP OFF
:Turn off Surround and DSP modes.
After pressing SOUND, you can perform the following operations:
FRONT•L then LEVEL +/–
:Adjust the left front speaker output
level. “FRL” appears on the display.
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
FRONT•R then LEVEL +/– :Adjust the right front speaker output
level. “FRR” appears on the display.
CENTER then LEVEL +/–
SURR•L then LEVEL +/–
SURR•R then LEVEL +/–
SBACK•L then LEVEL +/–
:Adjust the center speaker output level.
“CTR” appears on the display.
:Adjust the left surround speaker output
level. “SURRL” appears on the display.
:Adjust the right surround speaker output
level. “SURRR” appears on the display.
:Adjust the left surround back speaker
output level. “SBKL” appears on the
display.
:Adjust the right surround back speaker
output level. “SBKR” appears on the
display.
:Adjust the subwoofer output level.
“S-WFR” appears on the display.
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
DVD
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
TV/DBS
CDR
VCR1
VCR2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF
INPUT
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
2
3
MENU
SOUND
TEST
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
ENTER
4
5
6
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
SBACK•R then LEVEL +/–
SUBWFR then LEVEL +/–
7/P
8
9
MUTING DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
+10
10
0
+
100
RETURN FM MODE
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
+
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
TV/VIDEO
−
MENU
−
−
EXIT
TEXT
DISPLAY
PLAY
DIGITAL EQ then LEVEL+/– :Select the audio band and adjust its
frequency level. “EQ” appears on the
display.
:Turn on or off the test tone output.
:Turn on or off Bass Boost function.
REC
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
PAUSE
DOWN – TUNING – UP
SLEEP
TEST
BASS BOOST
CONTROL
STOP
Note:
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
After adjusting sounds, press the corresponding source selecting
button to operate your target source by using the 10 keys; otherwise,
the 10 keys cannot be used for operating your target source.
Note:
When you press one of the source selecting buttons, the
operation mode appears on the display window. For example,
the above illustration shows the remote control now works for
CD operation.
CD player
After pressing CD, you can perform the following operations on the
CD player:
Buttons
FM/AM
CD
Indications
TUNER
CD
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the current (or previous)
track.
CDR
CDR
¢
:Skip to the beginning of the next track.
:Stop playing.
:Pause playing. To resume press 3 PLAY.
:Select a track number directly.
For track number 5, press 5.
PHONO
TAPE/MD
PHONO
TAPE
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
1 – 10, +10
VCR1
TAPE
CONTROL (repeatedly)*
SOUND
CDR
CDDSC
SOUND
* By pressing CONTROL repeatedly, you can select “VCR1,”
“TAPE,” “CDR” or “CDDSC” as the source.
For track number 15, press +10, then 5.
For track number 20, press +10, then 10.
For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD changer
1 – 10, +10
:Select a track number directly.
For track number 5, press 5.
After selecting “CDDSC” by pressing CONTROL repeatedly, you
For track number 15, press +10, then 5.
For track number 20, press +10, then 10.
For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
:Enter recording pause by pressing this button.
To start recording again, press this button, then
3 PLAY.
can perform the following operations on a CD changer:
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) track.
REC PAUSE
¢
:Skip to the beginning of the next track.
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume press 3 PLAY.
:Select the number of a disc installed in a CD
changer.
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
1 – 6, 7/P
Note:
You can use either CDR or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed
above. If you press CDR, the playing source also changes. On the
other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “CDR,” the
playing source does not change.
After pressing CD, you can perform the following operations on the
CD changer:
1 – 10, +10
:Select a track number directly.
For track number 5, press 5.
Cassette deck
For track number 15, press +10, then 5.
For track number 20, press +10, then 10.
For track number 30, press +10, +10, then 10.
After pressing TAPE/MD (or selecting “TAPE” by pressing
CONTROL repeatedly), you can perform the following operations
on a cassette deck:
Example:
3 PLAY
REW
FF
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
REC PAUSE
:Start playing.
• Selecting disc number 4, track number 12, and starting playback.
1. Press CONTROL repeatedly until “CDDSC” appears on
the display window, then press 4.
:Fast wind the tape from right to left.
:Fast wind the tape from left to right.
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume, press 3 PLAY.
:Enter recording pause by pressing this button.
To start recording again, press this button, then
3 PLAY.
2. Press CD, then press +10, 2.
If your CD changer is of 200-disc loading capability (except for
XL-MC100 and XL-MC301),
you can do the following operations using the number buttons after
pressing CD.
Notes:
• When you use a cassette deck, change the source name
connected to TAPE/MD jacks correctly (see page 17).
• You can use either TAPE/MD or CONTROL to activate the buttons
listed above. If you press TAPE/MD, the playing source also
changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to
select “TAPE,” the playing source does not change.
1. Select a disc number.
2. Then select a track number (always enter two digits).
3. Start playback.
Examples:
• Selecting disc number 3, track number 2, and starting playback.
Press 3, then, 0, 2, then 3 PLAY.
• Selecting disc number 10, track number 5, and starting playback.
Press 1, 0, then, 0, 5, then 3 PLAY.
• Selecting disc number 105, track number 12, and starting
playback. Press 1, 0, 5, then 1, 2 then 3 PLAY.
MD recorder
After pressing TAPE/MD (or selecting “TAPE*” by pressing
CONTROL repeatedly), you can perform the following operations
on the MD recorder:
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) track.
:Skip to the beginning of the next track.
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume, press 3 PLAY.
:Enter recording pause by pressing this button.
To start recording again, press this button then
3 PLAY.
Turntable
After pressing PHONO, you can perform the following operations
on a turntable:
¢
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
REC PAUSE
3 PLAY
7 STOP
:Start playing.
:Stop playing.
CD recorder
After pressing CDR (or selecting “CDR” by pressing CONTROL
repeatedly), you can perform the following operations on a CD
recorder:
Notes:
• When you use an MD recorder, change the source name
connected to TAPE/MD jacks correctly (see page 17).
• You can use either TAPE/MD or CONTROL to activate the buttons
listed above. If you press TAPE/MD, the playing source also
changes. On the other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to
select “TAPE*,” the playing source does not change.
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) track.
:Skip to the beginning of the next track.
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume press 3 PLAY.
¢
* Selecting “TAPE” will allow you to control the MD recorder.
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VCR 1 (VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks)
Operating Video Components
You can always perform the following operations:
VCR1
:Turn on or off the VCR 1 (VCR connected to
the VCR 1 jacks).
IMPORTANT:
To operate JVC’s video components using this remote control:
• You need to connect JVC’s video components through the AV
COMPU LINK jacks (see page 49) in addition to the connections
using cables with RCA pin plugs (see pages 10 to 12).
• Some JVC’s VCRs can accept two types of the control signals—
remote code “A” and “B.” Before using this remote control, make
sure that the remote control code of the VCR connected to the VCR 1
jacks is set to code “A.”
– When another JVC’s VCR is connected to the VCR 2 or VIDEO
terminals, set its remote control code to code “B.” (This remote
control cannot emit the control signals of code “B.”)
• When using the remote control, aim the remote control directly at
the remote sensor on each component, not on the receiver.
After pressing VCR1 (or selecting “VCR1” by pressing CONTROL
repeatedly), you can perform the following operations on the VCR 1
(VCR connected to the VCR 1 jacks):
1 – 9, 0
3 PLAY
REW
:Select the TV channels on a VCR.
:Start playing.
:Rewind a tape.
FF
:Fast wind a tape.
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
REC PAUSE
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume press 3 PLAY.
:Enter recording pause by pressing this button.
To start recording again, press this button then
3 PLAY.
CH +/–
:Change the TV channels on the VCR.
Note:
You can use either VCR1 or CONTROL to activate the buttons listed
above. If you press VCR1, the playing source also changes. On the
other hand, if you press CONTROL repeatedly to select “VCR1,” the
playing source does not change.
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
DVD player
DVD
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
TV/DBS
CDR
After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI, you can perform the
following operations on a DVD player:
VCR1
VCR2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF
INPUT
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the current (or
previous) chapter.
:Skip to the beginning of the next chapter.
:Stop playing.
:Pause playing. To resume press 3 PLAY.
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
TEST
2
3
MENU
SOUND
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
ENTER
4
5
6
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
¢
7/P
8
9
MUTING DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
7 STOP
8 PAUSE
+10
10
0
+
100
RETURN FM MODE
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
+
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
TV/VIDEO
−
MENU
−
−
EXIT
∗FRONT•R
∗FRONT•L
TEXT
DISPLAY
After pressing DVD or DVD
MULTI, these buttons can be used
for the DVD menu operations.
PLAY
2
∗CENTER
5
3
REC
PAUSE
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
MENU
TEST
∗SUBWFR
DOWN – TUNING – UP
SLEEP
4
6
ENTER
Note:
CONTROL
STOP
∗SURR•L
For detailed menu operations, refer
to the instructions supplied with the
discs or the DVD player.
8
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
TV
Note:
You can always perform the following operations:
When you press one of the source selecting buttons, the
operation mode appears on the display window. For example,
the above illustration shows the remote control now works for
VCR 1 operation.
TV
:Turn on or off the TV.
:Adjust the volume.
:Set the input mode (either TV or VIDEO).
TV VOL +/–
TV/VIDEO
Buttons
VCR1
DVD or DVD MULTI
TV/DBS
Indications
VCR1
DVD
After pressing TV/DBS, you can perform the following operations
on a TV:
TV
CH +/–
1 – 9, 0, 100+ :Select the channels.
RETURN :Alternate between the previously selected
channel and the current channel.
:Change the channels.
VCR1
TAPE
CDR
CONTROL (repeatedly)*
CDDSC
* By pressing CONTROL repeatedly, you can select “VCR1,”
“TAPE,” “CDR” or “CDDSC” as the source.
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Other Manufacturers’ Video Equipment
This remote control supplied with the receiver can transmit control
signals for other manufacturers’ TVs, CATV converters, DBS
tuners, VCRs and DVD players. By changing the transmittable
signals from preset ones to the other manufacturers’, you can
operate the other manufacturers’ components using this remote
control.
To change the transmittable signals for
operating another manufacturer’s TV
1. Press and hold TV
2. Press TV/DBS.
.
When operating the other manufacturers’ components, refer also to
the manuals supplied with them. To operate these components with
the remote control, first you need to set the manufacturers’ codes for
each TV, CATV converters, DBS tuners VCR and DVD players.
“CALL” appears on the remote control display window.
3. Enter a manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
See the list below to find the code.
After replacing batteries for the remote control, you need to set the
4. Release TV
.
manufactures’ codes again.
The following buttons can be used for operating the TV:
TV
:Turn on and off the TV.
:Adjust the volume.
:Set the input mode (either TV
or VIDEO).
TV VOL +/–
TV/VIDEO
A/V CONTROL RECEIVER
After pressing TV/DBS, you can perform the following
operations on the TV:
CH +/–
1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10) :Select the channels.
The 10-key will function as the
:Change the channels.
CATV/DBS VCR1
TV
CD
AUDIO
DVD
DVD MULTI
VIDEO
FM/AM
PHONO
USB
ENTER button if your TV requires
pressing ENTER after selecting a
channel number.
TV/DBS
CDR
VCR1
VCR2 TAPE/MD
SURROUND DSP
SURR/DSP ANALOG/DIGITAL
OFF
INPUT
ANALOG
DIRECT
BASS
BOOST
FRONT•L FRONT•R
∗
∗
1
2
3
Notes:
MENU
SOUND
TEST
CENTER SUBWFR
∗
∗
4
5
6
• Refer also to the manual supplied with your TV.
• All the functions listed above may not be assigned to the
buttons for some TVs.
• If you cannot change the channels of some TVs by pressing
number buttons, press CH +/– for changing the channels.
ENTER
DIMMER
SURR•L
SURR•R
∗
∗
7/P
8
9
MUTING DIGITALEQ SBACK•L SBACK•R
∗
∗
∗
+10
10
0
+
100
RETURN FM MODE
CATV/DBS
CONTROL
+
+
+
CH/ LEVEL TV VOL
VOLUME
∗
TV/VIDEO
−
−
−
EXIT
5. Try to operate your TV by pressing TV
.
TEXT
DISPLAY
PLAY
MENU
When your TV turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
REC
PAUSE
/REW
FF/
PAUSE
SET
DOWN – TUNING – UP
SLEEP
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of TV,
CONTROL
STOP
try each one until the correct one is entered.
RM-SRX8020J REMOTE CONTROL
Manufacturer
Codes
Manufacturer
Codes
JVC
00*, 02, 13,
14, 47, 74
01, 02
QUELLE
52, 53, 54, 55,
56, 57, 58, 59,
60, 61, 62, 63,
64, 65, 66, 67
08, 24, 29, 30,
31, 48
32, 33, 68, 69,
70
06, 08, 16, 34,
35, 49
AKAI
Note:
BLAUPUNKT 03, 04,
FISHER
When you press one of the source selecting buttons, the
operation mode appears on the display window. For example,
the above illustration shows the remote control now works for
TV operation.
01, 05
03, 06, 07
08, 09, 10, 49 SABA
02
11, 12
RCA/
PROSCAN
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
IRADDIO
ITT/NOKIA
LOEWE
SAMSUNG
Buttons
TV/DBS
CATV/DBS CONTROL
VCR1
Indications
TV
CATV
VCR1
06, 15, 16
MAGNAVOX 08, 17, 49
METS
MITSUBISHI 08, 18, 19, 20 SHARP
MIVAR 21 SONY
NORDMENDE 22, 23
OKANO 15
PANASONIC 24, 25, 26, 27 TOSHIBA
SANYO
01, 05
50, 51, 52, 53 SCHNEIDER 02, 15, 36
37, 38, 77
39
DVD or DVD MULTI
DVD
TELEFUNKEN 40, 41, 42, 69
THOMSON
71, 72
37, 43, 44
45, 46
76
ZENITH
PHILIPS
15, 17, 28, 75
*Initial setting
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they
are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For CATV converter
Manufacturer Codes
To change the transmittable signals for
operating a CATV converter or DBS tuner
GENERAL INSTRUMENT 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14, 29
1. Press and hold CATV/DBS
.
HAMLIN/REGAL
JERROLD
01, 02, 03, 04, 05
06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11,
12, 13, 14
15, 16, 17
18, 19, 20
21, 22
2. Press CATV/DBS CONTROL.
“CALL” appears on the remote control display window.
3 Enter a manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
OAK
PANASONIC
PIONEER
See the following lists to find the code.
4. Release CATV/DBS
.
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
TOCOM
23, 24, 25
26
The following buttons can be used for operating the CATV
converter and DBS tuner:
ZENITH
27, 28
CATV/DBS
:Turn on and off the CATV converter
or DBS tuner.
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they
are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.
CH +/–
:Change the channels.
1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10) :Select the channels.
The 10-key will function as the
ENTER button if your equipment
requires pressing ENTER after
selecting a channel number.
To change the transmittable signals for
operating another manufacturer’s VCR
Note:
1. Press and hold VCR1
2. Press VCR1.
.
Refer also to the manual supplied with your CATV converter or
DBS tuner.
“CALL” appears on the remote control display window.
5. Try to operate your CATV converter or DBS
3. Enter manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
tuner by pressing CATV/DBS
.
When your CATV converter or DBS tuner turns on or off, you
have entered the correct code.
See the list on the next page to find the code.
4. Release VCR1
.
The following buttons can be used for operating the VCR:
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of
CATV converter or DBS tuner, try each one until the correct
one is entered.
VCR1 :Turn on and off the VCR.
After pressing VCR1, you can perform the following operations
on the VCR:
Note:
You cannot preset the signals for both the CATV converter and DBS
tuner at the same time.
CH +/–
:Change the TV channels on the
VCR.
1 – 10, 0, 100+ (+10) :Select the TV channels.
The 10-key will function as the
ENTER button if your VCR requires
pressing ENTER after selecting a
channel number.
For DBS tuner
Manufacturer
Codes
JVC
56*, 57, 67
43, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 49
30
50, 51, 67
31
32, 33
48, 52, 53, 54, 55
AMSTRAD
BLAUPUNKT
ECHOSTAR
GOLDSTAR
GRUNDIG
HIRSHMANN
INSTRUMENT
ITT/NOKIA
KATHREIN
NEC
3 PLAY
REW
:Start playback.
:Rewind a tape.
FF
:Fast wind a tape.
7 STOP
8 PAUSE:
:Stop playing or recording.
:Pause playing. To resume press
3 PLAY.
68
34
REC PAUSE
:Enter recording pause by pressing
this button.
52, 58, 59, 60, 61, 62, 63
35, 36
48
37, 38
65
To start recording again, press this
button then 3 PLAY.
ORBITECH
PHILIPS
Note:
RCA
SAMSUNG
SCHWAIGER
SIEMENS
SONY
39, 40
61, 64
41, 42
66
Refer also to the manual supplied with your VCR.
5. Try to operate your VCR by pressing VCR1
When your VCR turns on or off, you have entered the correct
code.
.
TECHNISAT
48
*Initial setting
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of
VCR, try each one until the correct one is entered.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manufacturer
JVC
AIWA
BELL & HOWELL
BLAUPUNKT
CGM
EMERSON
FISHER
Codes
∗FRONT•R
∗FRONT•L
After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI,
these buttons can be used for the
DVD menu operations.
00*, 26, 27, 28, 29, 58
2
∗CENTER
5
3
MENU
01, 02
03
04, 05
06, 07
TEST
∗SUBWFR
4
6
ENTER
Note:
∗SURR•L
For detailed menu operations, refer to
the instructions supplied with the
discs or the DVD player.
8
08, 10, 11, 12, 64, 65
03, 14, 15, 16, 17
FUNAI
01
GE
18, 19, 20
07
13, 21
06, 22
18, 23, 24, 25, 66
07, 21
Note:
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRUNDIG
HITACHI
Refer also to the manual supplied with your DVD player.
5. Try to operate your DVD player by pressing one
of the above buttons.
LOEWE
• DO NOT forget to turn on the DVD player before pressing
one of the above buttons.
MAGNAVOX
MITSUBISHI
NEC
NOKIA
NORDMENDE
ORION
04, 19, 24
30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35
26, 27
03, 36
38
09
If there are more than one code listed for your brand of
DVD, try each one until the correct one is entered.
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
RCA/PROSCAN
SABA
19, 24, 39, 40
04, 19, 21, 24, 41, 42
21
04, 18, 19, 23, 24, 43, 44, 45
38, 46
Manufacturer
Codes
JVC
00*, 02
01
DENON
SAMSUNG
SANYO
SHARP
SIEMENS
SONY
TELEFUNKEN
TOSHIBA
ZENITH
45, 47, 59, 61, 62, 63
03, 48, 49
37, 50
03, 51
52, 53, 54
55, 60
PANASONIC
PHILIPS
PIONEER
RCA
03
13
04, 05, 06
07
SAMSUNG
SONY
08
43, 44
56, 57
09
TOSHIBA
YAMAHA
10
*Initial setting
11, 12
*Initial setting
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they
are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.
Manufacturers’ codes are subject to change without notice. If they
are changed, this remote control cannot operate the equipment.
To change the transmittable signals for
operating another manufacturer’s DVD player
1. Press and hold AUDIO
2 Press DVD.
.
“CALL” appears on the remote control display window.
3. Enter a manufacturer’s code using buttons 1–9,
and 0.
See the following list to find the code.
4. Release AUDIO
.
After pressing DVD or DVD MULTI, you can perform the
following operations on the DVD player:
3 PLAY
4
:Start playing.
:Return to the beginning of the
current (or previous) chapter.
:Skip to the beginning of the next
chapter.
¢
7 STOP
:Stop playing.
8 PAUSE
:Pause playing. To resume press
3 PLAY.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
Use this chart to help you solve daily operational problems. If there is any problem you cannot solve, contact your JVC’s
service center.
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
The display does not light up.
The power cord is not plugged in.
Plug the power cord into an AC outlet. (See page 15.)
No sound from speakers.
Speaker signal cables are not connected.
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if necessary.
(See pages 6 to 8.)
The SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 buttons are not
set correctly.
Press SPEAKERS ON/OFF 1 and
SPEAKERS ON/OFF 2 correctly. (See page 18.)
An incorrect source is selected.
Muting is activated.
Select the correct source.
Press MUTING to cancel the mute. (See page 20.)
An incorrect input mode (analog or
digital) is selected.
Select the correct input mode (analog or digital).
(See page 19.)
Connections are incorrect.
Check connections.
For analog connections, see pages 8 to 12.
For digital connections, see page 13.
For USB connection, see page 14.
Sound from one speaker only.
Speaker signal cables are not connected
properly.
Check speaker wiring and reconnect if necessary.
(See pages 6 to 8.)
The balance is set to one extreme.
Adjust the balance properly. (See page 40.)
No sound from PC connected with a USB
cable.
An electrical shock is applied to the
receiver, PC, or USB cable.
Turn off the receiver once, then turn it on again and
restart application installed in the PC.
USB device is not selected on the
computer.
Select “USB Audio Device [1]” for “Playback” of
“Audio.” (See page 14.)
Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC.
“Mute” is selected on the PC.
Check if the volume is set at low level.
Refer to the manuals supplied with your PC.
Noise while reproducing PC sound
connected with a USB cable.
Strong electromagnetic wave is emitted
from a nearby device such as TV
Move the PC away from the device such as TV
emitting strong electromagnetic wave.
Sound from PC connected with a USB
cable is intermittent.
PC is subjected to excessive load due to
using other applications.
Close the applications you do not use.
Continuous hiss or buzzing during FM
reception.
Incoming signal is too weak.
Connect an outdoor FM antenna or contact your
dealer. (See page 5.)
The station is too far away.
An incorrect antenna is used.
Select a new station.
Check with your dealer to be sure you have the
correct antenna.
Antennas are not connected properly.
Ignition noise from automobiles.
Check connections. (See pages 5 and 6.)
Occasional cracking noise during FM
reception.
Move the antenna further from automobile traffic.
Noise is heard while playing a record.
A ground cable from the turntable is not
connected to the screw marked (H) on
the rear panel.
Connect the cable to the screw marked (H) on the
rear panel.
Howling during record playing.
Your turntable is too close to the
speakers.
Move the speakers away from the turntable.
Turn off the Analog Direct. (See page 30.)
No sound effect such as Surround mode,
DSP mode and digital equalization.
The Analog Direct is turned on.
6.1-channel reproduction cannot be done
for Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES
software.
Software or setting is not for Dolby
Digital EX or DTS ES software.
Play back software bearing the mark
.
Set “EX/ES” setting to “AUTO.” (See page 23.)
or
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PROBLEM
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SOLUTION
1.Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
“OVERLOAD” starts flashing on the
Speakers are overloaded because of
high volume.
display.
turn off the receiver.
2.Stop the playback source.
3.Turn on the receiver again and adjust the volume.
Speakers are overloaded because of
short circuit of speaker terminals.
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to turn
off the receiver, then check the speaker wiring.
If “OVERLOAD” does not disappear, unplug the AC
power cord, then plug it back again.
If speaker wiring is not short-circuited, contact your
dealer.
The STANDBY lamp lights up after
turning on the power, and soon the
receiver turns off again (into standby
mode).
The receiver is overloaded because of
high voltage.
Press STANDBY/ON
off the receiver. After unplugging the AC power
cord, consult your dealer.
on the front panel to turn
Remote control does not work.
There is an obstruction between the
remote sensor on the receiver and the
remote control.
Remove the obstruction.
Batteries are weak.
Replace batteries. (See page 15.)
Remote control does not work intendedly.
An incorrect remote control operation
mode is selected.
Select the correct remote control operation mode.
(See pages 51 to 53.)
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Specifications
Amplifier
Output Power:
At Stereo operation:
Front channels:
120 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω,
20 Hz to 20 kHz, with no more than 0.08% total
harmonic distortion.
At Surround operation:
Front channels:
100 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no
more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Center channel:
100 W, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no more than
0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Surround channels:
100 W per channel, min. RMS, driven into 8 Ω at 1 kHz, with no
more than 0.8% total harmonic distortion.
Audio
Audio Input Sensitivity/Impedance (1 kHz):
PHONO (MM):
2.5 mV/47 kΩ
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:
200 mV/47 kΩ
Audio Input (DIGITAL IN)* :
Coaxial: DIGITAL 1 (DVD):
Optical: DIGITAL 2 (CD), DIGITAL 3 (TV), DIGITAL 4 (CDR):
–21 dBm to –15 dBm (660 nm 30 nm)
0.5 V(p-p)/75 Ω
*Corresponding to Linear PCM, Dolby Digital, and DTS Digital Surround (with
sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz).
USB:
Revision 1.0, full-speed (with sampling frequency — 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz)
Audio Output Level:
Recording Output Level:
Digital output:
PRE OUT
1.0 V
VCR 1, VCR 2, CDR, TAPE/MD:
Optical: DIGITAL OUTPUT:
200 mV
Signal wave length: 660 nm
Output level: –21 dBm to –15 dBm
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (’66 IHF/’78 IHF):
PHONO:
70 dB/78 dB (at REC OUT)
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:
92 dB/80 dB
Frequency Response (8 Ω):
PHONO:
20 Hz to 20 kHz ( 1 dB)
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS, CD, CDR, TAPE/MD:
20 Hz to 100 kHz (+1 dB, –3 dB)
USB:
20 Hz to 20 kHz (+1 dB, –3 dB)
RIAA Phono Equalization:
Bass boost:
1.0 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)
+6 dB 1.0 dB at 100 Hz
Video
Video Input Sensitivity/Impedance:
Composite video:
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS:
DVD, VCR 1, VCR 2, VIDEO, TV SOUND/DBS:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
S-video:
(Y: luminance):
(C: chrominance, burst): 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(Y: luminance):
(PB/PR):
Component video:
DVD, DBS:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Video Output Level:
Composite video:
S-video:
VCR 1, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT:
VCR 1, VCR 2, MONITOR OUT:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(Y: luminance):
(C: chrominance, burst): 0.286 V(p-p)/75 Ω
(Y: luminance):
(PB/PR):
Component video:
MONITOR OUT:
1 V(p-p)/75 Ω
0.7 V(p-p)/75 Ω
Synchronization:
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
On-Screen System:
Negative
45 dB
NTSC
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM tuner (IHF)
Tuning Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
87.5 MHz to 108.0 MHz
Monaural:
12.8 dBf (1.2 µV/75 Ω)
50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:
Monaural:
Stereo:
21.3 dBf (3.2 µV/75 Ω)
41.3 dBf (31.5 µV/75 Ω)
Signal-to-Noise Ratio (IHF-A weighted):
Total Harmonic Distortion:
Monaural:
Stereo:
78 dB at 85 dBf
73 dB at 85 dBf
Monaural:
Stereo:
0.4% at 1 kHz
0.6% at 1 kHz
Stereo Separation at REC OUT:
Alternate Channel Selectivity:
Frequency Response:
35 dB at 1 kHz
45 dB: ( 400 kHz)
30 Hz to 15 kHz: (+0.5 dB, –3 dB)
AM tuner
Tuning Range:
Usable Sensitivity:
530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
Loop antenna
400 µV/m
Signal-to-Noise Ratio:
50 dB (100 mV/m)
General
Power Requirements:
Power Consumption:
AC 120V , 60 Hz
320 W/440 VA (at operation)
2 W (in standby mode)
Dimensions (W x H x D):
Mass:
435 mm x 156.5 mm x 425 mm
(17 3/16 in. x 6 3/16 in. x 16 3/4 in.)
11.8 kg (26.1 lbs)
Designs & specifications are subject to change without notice.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VICTOR COMPANY OF JAPAN, LIMITED
J
C
0402NHMMDWJEIN
V
EN,FR
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Ingersoll Rand Remote Starter 3524832 User Manual
Intel Computer Hardware Vig390s User Manual
Jenn Air Cooktop JGC8645 User Manual
Juniper Networks Computer Drive 44050456001 User Manual
JVC CRT Television 0204 T CR JMUK User Manual
JVC CRT Television AV 14F43 AV 20N43 AV 21D43 User Manual
JVC Stereo Receiver RX 5042S User Manual
Jwin Portable CD Player JX CD5500 User Manual
Kenmore Vacuum Cleaner 721358205 User Manual
Kenwood Stereo System HM 535 User Manual